Home

Saab 9-7X Automobile User Manual

1. sen 5 97 rpm 5 99 Sheet Metal Damage seeseseess 5 104 Mg 5 104 Underbody Maintenance esses 5 104 Washing Your Vehicle ssessesse 5 101 WeatherstlipS maip oerte oe aR 5 100 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades 5 102 Appointments Scheduling Service 7 8 Audio Syste i iocans NE ELERS uie 3 57 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 3 97 Fixed Mast Antenna eeeseeseeesse 3 99 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual 12 2 ett reete dae er rni een 3 74 Audio System cont Radio Reception 572 oregano etae 3 98 Rear Seat Audio RSA o n 3 95 setting tle COCK ss iii cocer tx uror ns 3 57 Theft Deterrent Feature sesssss 3 97 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 99 Audio System s ssseA 3 58 Automatic Headlamp System 3 14 Automatic Transmission a0 EP 5 25 Operation 2 eiecit tee ore ete ee 2 24 Battery EU 5 42 Electric Power Management 3 17 Run Down Protection esee 3 18 s Trofeo siea nee a ere dertil eres 3 74 Brake Emergencies 52 herreder 4 6 Brake Fluid 2i seio i Uer pre HER deler 5 39 DICIC MP 5 39 System Warning Light sssssesssesse 3 31 Braking ear e ated toate E 4 4 Braking in Emergencies eese 4 6 Brea
2. ssesseeeeess 3 16 D me Camps ptes haabe Mirage E eres 3 16 Door Delayed Locking sn aiaa 2 8 LOCKS edheucessidnc essei Ea eee eee Eee 2 7 Power Door Locks vcs eoe ette 2 8 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 9 Rear Door Security Locks sssssss 2 11 Driver Information Center DIC 3 42 DIC Operation and Displays 3 42 DIC Vehicle Customization sss 3 51 DIC Warnings and Messages 3 45 Driving At fo RE e sacha 4 14 Before a Long Trip eeeeseesessese 4 16 DJefenslV6 sessenta tr AE he ad AEE 4 2 DUNK GM ERE SEERE SR BEES ceca qii mene ebumanee E e a UA 4 3 Highway Hypnosis aser irere 4 16 Hill and Mountain Roads sssseuues 4 17 In Rain and on Wet Roads 4 15 jest M 4 13 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 4 21 WINTER ET 4 18 Driving for Better Fuel Economy 4 2 Dual Automatic Climate Control System 3 19 DVD Rear Seat Entertainment System 3 84 D 7 15 Electrical System Add On Equipment esee 5 106 Engine Compartment Fuse Block 5 107 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 5 107 Headlamps zc 2 1 ce trea Tus ete rines 5 106 Powe
3. 5 94 Tire Sidewall Labeling esses 5 60 Tire Terminology and Definitions 5 62 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 5 76 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 5 78 Wheel Replacement sseeseeereess 5 79 When It Is Time for New Tires 5 73 Towing Recreational Vehicle 2 ccseeeeeeeeeereeees 4 28 Towing a Traller cette tonnes 4 29 Your Vehicle iei irr iit toe tieni annid 4 27 Traction Limited Slip Rear Axle sssss 4 10 StabiliTrak System serisine raean 4 6 Transmission Fluid Automatic Lesser 5 25 Transmission Operation Automatic 2 24 Trip Odometer arasen detta Ou eaae neci Dus DKKR 3 26 Turn and Lane Change Signals 3 7 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever 3 6 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 5 76 Universal Home Remote System 2 38 Operation sess 2 39 Vehicle ei 4 3 LOGGING eter E 4 21 Running While Parked eeeeeesesse 2 31 SM c EE iii Vehicle Customization DIC 3 51 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 7 15 Vehicle Identification Number VIN ssesenmH eeaeeeeeaes 5 105 Service Parts Identification Label
4. sees 2 34 OperatlOl sip t RR RENDER Lu abe MER UU 2 18 Outside Heated Mirrors ecce rcnt 2 34 2 1 Section 2 Features and Controls OnStar System l l 2 35 Universal Home Remote System 2 38 Universal Home Remote System Operation With One Triangular LED sssss 2 39 Storage Areas eeaeee neren errenneren 2 43 Glove qw 2 43 Gupholders niis ertt ta erret Si Eii 2 43 Overhead Console sssseeene 2 44 Center Console Storage eceeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 2 44 Luggage Carrier sese 2 44 Rear Floor Storage Cover sssssssse 2 45 Gargo COVER ger em 2 46 Cargo Tie Downs laila ale 2 47 MGONFOOR io 2 47 Keys ACAUTION Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children This vehicle has double sided keys that can be used for the ignition and door lock When a new vehicle is delivered the dealer retailer provides the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key code number The key code number tells your dealer retailer or a qual
5. 5 105 Ventilation Adjustment seeseeeeeeee 3 23 EIE E 2 15 Voltmeter Gage sseem 3 30 13 W Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 24 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages 3 45 Hazard Warning Flashers ssssssss 3 6 Safety and Symbols W ssseseeererereere nerne iii Washer Headlamps 0c ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 3 10 Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance 5 78 Different Size eene rn eee Y eee 5 76 Replacement rancores iniaa nna 5 79 Where to Put the Restraint sessesssssse 1 38 MIDOOWS om cnancsn atte acerca NEN at E T antes 2 13 gre 2 14 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades Cleaning 5 102 Replacement ore preat annee N EN 5 56 Washan aeria E a IK 3 9 14 Windshield cont Washer FIUIG octo thc tiber tarte 5 38 Wiper Blade Replacement 5 56 Wiper FUSES e 5 106 lc MR 3 8 Windshield Rear Washer Wiper 3 9 Winter DIVINO wacsncicetcutiencsnteiatwenamoncneseditirethanscae 4 18 XM Radio Messages eee A 3 72 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 99 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2
6. W W u u sseseeeeeeee renee ener en ner enene 5 86 Add On Electrical Equipment 5 106 Headlamps siina i e eres red 5 106 Secondary Latch System sssesssss 5 91 Windshield Wiper F 5 106 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 5 94 p nes Hs iper See axis ObfionBs 5 106 Spare TINE riea E 5 97 ower Windows and Other Power Options Fuses and Circuit Breakers 5 107 Appearance Care 5 97 Engine Compartment Fuse Block 5 107 Interior GIG ANN c 5 97 Rear Underseat Fuse Block eaaa 5 110 Fabric Canpet 2 sea tet reete NNE 5 99 m mo ue TC EE 5 99 Capacities and Specifications 5 113 5 2 Service For service and parts needs visit your dealer retailer Accessories and Modifications When you add non dealer non retailer accessories to your vehicle they can affect vehicle performance and safety including such things as airbags braking stability ride and handling emissions systems aerodynamics durability and electronic systems like antilock brakes traction control and stability control Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Damage to vehicle components resulting from the installation or use on non Saab certified parts including control module modifications are not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and ma
7. Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip If yes continue If no return to the booster seat f you have the choice a child should sit in a position with a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts A An older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 23 According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint System or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly 1 29 A CAUTION Never do this Never allow two children to wear the same safety belt The safety belt can not properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A safety belt must be used by only one pe
8. esseeseesssess 1 23 Safety Belt Extender ssssssss 1 28 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 27 Safety Belts Are for Everyone 1 10 Safety Warnings and Symbols sssssse iii Scheduled Maintenance sss 6 4 Seats Head Restraints ccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenees 1 7 Heated Seats intime senenn eenia he 1 3 MEMON as ar aar oM 1 3 Seats cont Power LUMDAR ccs ron ienn 1 2 Power Reclining Seatbacks sssussss 1 5 Power Sealses niuis agona ine EEAS 1 2 Rear Seat Operation ssssseseeess 1 8 Secondary Latch System sssssssess 5 91 Securing a Child Restraint Center Rear Seat Position 1 48 Rear Outside Seat Position 1 46 Right Front Seat Position 1 48 Security Light x oiii retest aa ESAR 3 38 GIN lE 5 3 Accessories and Modifications 5 3 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Urs 5 5 All Wheel Drive Light sueessese 3 40 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 5 3 California Proposition 65 Warning 5 3 Doing Your Own Work sees 5 4 Engine Soon Lamp ueeeeeesss 3 34 Publications Ordering Information 7 14 Servic
9. prian 3 28 Airbag System W W sssseeerereeererre renere nn nene 1 52 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped lp aiden ceanenatesmcndtechavngenme wieatecenumatenns 1 65 How Does an Airbag Restrain 1 57 Passenger Sensing System 1 59 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 64 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 1 57 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 58 When Should an Airbag Inflate 1 56 Where Are the Airbags sssseseesse 1 54 All Wheel Drive cene rere nnne 5 47 All Wheel Drive AWD System 4 10 All Wheel Drive Service Light 3 40 Antenna Fixed Mast csse 3 99 Antenna XM Satellite Radio Antenna KIC MM T 3 99 Antilock Brake System ABS sssssss 4 5 Antilock Brake System Warning Light 3 32 Appearance Care Aluminum Wheels eeeeseseeeess 5 103 Care of Safety Belts ssssssssssse 5 100 Chemical Paint Spotting ssssssse 5 104 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 5 101 Fabric Carpet 2 cese sene eade heh euet 5 99 Finish Gare oce eerte re Sene 5 102 Finish Damage icc can eter derer e re Re tebema 5 104 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic SC TS 5 100 Interior Cleaning
10. 2 Say End Call The call is then ended Muting a Call During a call all sounds from inside the vehicle can be muted so that the person on the other end of the call cannot hear them To Mute a call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Mute Call The system responds with Call muted 3 81 To Cancel Mute 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 After the tone say Mute Call The system responds with Resuming call Transferring a Call Audio can be transferred between the in vehicle Bluetooth system and the cell phone To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone During a call with the audio in the vehicle 1 Press t The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Transfer Call The system responds with Transferring call and the audio will switch from the vehicle to the cell phone To Transfer Audio to the In Vehicle Bluetooth System The cellular phone must be paired and connected with the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred The connection process can take up to two minutes after the key is turned to the ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY position 3 82 During a call with the audio on the cell phone press for more than two seconds The audio switches from the cell phone to the vehicle Voice Pass Thru Voice Pass Thru allows access to the voice recognition commands on the cell phone See th
11. sssse 6 2 Owner Checks and Services 6 8 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 12 Scheduled Maintenance ssss 6 4 USING arenie ene REPOS aioe Ere tieu 6 2 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 Malfunction Indicator Lamp esses 3 34 Memory Seat ssssssssmm 1 3 Message DIC Warnings and Messages 3 45 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview 2 32 Outside Convex Mirror eene 2 34 Outside Heated Mirrors sssss 2 34 Outside Power Mirrors eeeeeeeeee 2 34 MOORFOOf ai rne Eee rana RE XR ERE Lea da ade 2 47 MIPS uclepllDt el Me DEED eel E netus 3 68 MyGMEbinKk com nir ceres tnnt ttd t RI Rh eta 7 5 N Navigation System Privacy ssesssssse 7 17 Navigation Radio System see Navigation HEDE TQUE eer 3 74 New Vehicle Break In ssseeseusuueuss 2 19 buc 3 26 Odometer THP iier rint eec eR ap IRE Hd 3 26 Off Road Driving eee 4 13 Off Road Recovery screen error 4 12 Oil ENGE c S 5 18 Pressure Gage seen 3 37 Oil Engine Oil Life System esses 5 22 Older Children Restraints s esee 1 28 Online Owner Center sssseseseseeesee 7 5 OnStar Privat au aaea Me Rios b pP M UREURTM
12. 2 Use a tool to reach through the access hole in the trim panel 3 Pry the left release lever up to the unlock position Pry the right release lever up to unlatch the liftgate 4 Reinstall the trim plug Windows ACAUTION Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather 2 13 Power Windows A CAUTION Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows The controls for the power windows are located on the armrest on each of the side doors With power windows the switches operate the windows when the ignition is in ON RUN ACC ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 21 The driver s door also has a switch for each of the pas
13. ACAUTION A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible lf the vehicle has been in a crash do you need new safety belts or LATCH system if equipped parts After a very minor crash nothing may be necessary But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged See your dealer retailer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or replaced If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash you may need new LATCH system parts New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt or LATCH system if equipped was not being used at the time of the crash If an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash if the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or while you are driving See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 28 1 67 42 NOTES 1 68 Section 2 Features and Controls KEYS 2 3 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 19 Remote Keyless
14. AUTO AUTO Ea VOL Radio with CD MP3 3 58 Radio with Six Disc CD Player The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system If the vehicle has a Bose audio system it has 6 channels of custom equalization XMIM Satellite Radio Service XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial free music coast to coast and in digital quality sound During your trial or when you subscribe you will get unlimited access to XM Radio Online for when you are not in the vehicle A service fee is required to receive the XM service For more information contact XM at xmradio com or call 1 800 929 2100 in the U S and xmradio ca or call 1 877 438 9677 in Canada Playing the Radio O Power Volume Press to turn the system on and off Turn to increase or to decrease the volume DISP Display Press to display the time while the ignition is turned off For XM press the DISP button while in XM mode to retrieve four different categories of information related to the current song or channel Artist Song Title Category or PTY Channel Number Channel Name To change the default on the display press the DISP button until the desired option displays then hold this knob for two seconds One beep sounds and the selected display becomes the default AUTO VOL Automatic Volume With automati
15. Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage the vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years To help keep the paint finish looking new keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible 5 102 Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However chrome polish may be used on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with glass cleaner Clean the rubber blades using a lint free c
16. OVerVIeW erdene irn hasan addensesautddatucehantans se 3 4 JUMP Staring i ecce eee hb 5 43 Keyless Entry System cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeee sees 2 4 Cy MD 2 3 Labeling Tire Sidewall esssssssse 5 60 Lamp Malfunction Indicator eea 3 34 Lamps Pm 3 16 Dome Lamp Override sssesessss 3 16 RE AGING e ber aka nens ber Lon 3 17 Lap Shoulder Belt cceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeneees 1 23 LATCH System for Child Restraints 1 39 License Plate Lamps 0 ceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 55 Liftgate Liftglass eese 2 12 Eiftglass Eiftgate iei ote eter eR 2 12 Light Airbag Readiness eeeee 3 28 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning 3 32 Brake System Warning sssssssse 3 31 Charging SYSTEM auae sut anaiei 3 30 Check Gages Warning ceceeeeeeeneeeeen eens 3 40 Check Gas Cap isotope ries 3 41 CRUISE CONOL EP 3 38 G te Ajai ame 3 40 IHighbeatm On s songs mere eE EEN ae 3 39 Low Fuel Warming erre reat 3 41 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 3 29 Reduced Engine Power seeeeeeeeee eee es 3 39 Safety Belt Reminders sssssessss 3 27 Light cont SIMI mm 3 38 Service All Wheel Drive eese 3 40 StabiliTrak Service een 3 32 StabiliTrak Indicators 3 33 Tire Press uke soot cnt tero rk edo E
17. The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 107 If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not flash the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer PASS Key III Electronic Immobilizer Your PASS Key III system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment PASS Key Ill uses a radio frequency transponder in the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle PASS Key III Electronic Immobilizer Operation Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS Key III Personalized Automotive Security System theft deterrent system PASS Key III is a passive theft deterrent system The system is automatically armed when the key is removed from the ign
18. hoist However storing it that way for an extended period could damage the wheel To avoid this always stow the wheel properly with the valve stem VAN CAUTION pointing up and have the wheel repaired as soon as possible The underbody mounted spare tire needs to be stored with the valve stem pointing up If the spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing downward its secondary latch will not work properly and the spare tire could loosen and suddenly fall CAUTION Continued 5 94 Follow this diagram to store the underbody mounted flat 3 Make sure the valve stem is pointed up and to or spare tire the rear Wheel Wrench 4 Pull the retainer D through the wheel Hoist Shaft 5 Put the socket end of the extension C through the Extension hole just above the rear bumper at a 45 degree angle downward Connect the socket end of moop Retainer i the extension to the hoist shaft B ine SARA Tire 6 Raise the tire fully against the underside of the f vehicle Continue turning the wheel wrench A Pointed Up clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice This indicates that the tire is secure and the cable is tight The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened 1 Put the tire E on the ground at the rear of the vehicle 2 Remove the hubcap if the vehicle has one from the flat tire by tapping the backside of the hubcap with the wheel wrench A Store in a safe location until the flat tir
19. located on the top of the seatback and push the head restraint down Rear Seats Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts Rear Seat Operation and return them to their normal stowed position Your vehicle has flip and fold second row seats which betore toiding a reaf seat provide additional cargo space To flip and fold the seat s do the following 2 Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seatback and fold the seatback forward The head restraint will automatically fold out of the way as the seatback is folded down 1 Pull up on the loop located where the seat cushion meets the seatback and flip the seat cushion forward 1 8 To return the seat s to the original position do the following ACAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 1 Lift the seatback until it locks into the upright position Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked Return the head restraints to the upright position by reaching behind the seat and pulling it forward until it locks into place Push and pull on the head restraint to make sure that it is locked Flip the seat cushion back into place Safety Belts Safety B
20. 08 Power Seats 09 Rear Wiper y 16 Vehicle Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL 17 Passenger Side Rear Parking Lamps Liftgate Module Driver Seat Module 01 02 RT DRS LT DR 03 Lou 2 CX 08 09 m SIEA ie VEH Em RR PRK 197 M LGM DSM Seine HEDE am TR 46 SUK PwRY rana 5 111 Fuses Usage 5 112 Front Parking Lamps Rear Left Turn Signal Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning 1 Front Right Turn Signal Trailer Park Rear Right Turn Signal Auxiliary Power 1 Ignition 0 Four Wheel Drive Front Left Turn Signal Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 for more information Sem English Metic For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood See your dealer for more information Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a Cooling System 6 0L V8 Engine 5 113 a Fuel Tank 22 0 gal 83 3 L Transfer Case Lubricant 2 0 qt Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill 5 0 qt Wheel Nut Torque 100 Ib ft 140 Nem All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this manual Recheck the fluid level after filling Engine Specifications engine VNo Transmission Spark Pug Gap 6 0L V8 Engine 5 114 Section
21. 7 17 OnStar System see OnStar Manual 2 35 Operation Universal Home Remote System 2 39 Outlet Adjustment esee 3 23 Outlets Accessory Power eeseeeeeeeneneneee 3 18 Outside Convex Mirror esses 2 34 Heated Mirrors 1 aeree rene nere 2 34 Power MINOIS ciesa ainne ee e ka te np nens 2 34 Overhead Console sssesessessesee 2 44 Owner Checks and Services sssuss 6 8 Owners Canadian eese ii Paint Damage 2 uterine rrt tnl 5 104 Park Shifting Into oineraino 2 28 Shifting Out OF 1 eain dees 2 29 Park Brake incite Sixt a er rande bises e din 2 27 Parking Over Things That Burn sessseesess 2 30 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 3 29 Passenger Sensing System ssssss 1 59 grippe P mm 4 12 PASS KEY Ill Electronic Immobilizer 2 17 PASS Key III Electronic Immobilizer uiu ID 2 18 Perchlorate Materials Requirements Galifornia eei toe gei oue ed 5 8 Personalization Climate Controls 3 24 Phone Bluetooth lE E 3 74 Power BOR MOCKS E Pc 2 8 Electrical System sss 5 106 Lumbar Controls essere 1 2 Power cont Reclining Seatbacks sseesesesessss 1 5 Reduced Engine Light 3 39 Retained Accessory sessee
22. Additional Required Services 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 40000 80 000 oen 000 000 000 20000 000 een 000 Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks be Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components Replace engine air cleaner filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 24 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter severe service See footnotes g and h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter normal service See footnote g Automatic transfer case only Change transfer case fluid See footnote g Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service V8 engine only Inspect spark plug wires An Emission Control Service Additional Required Services cont d 150 000 ae 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 40000 80000 120 000 160 000 200 000 240 000 Engine cooling system service or every five years whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote i Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service See footnote l Maintenance Footnotes a Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc b Visually inspect front and rear suspension
23. Battery This vehicle has a maintenance free battery When it is time for a new battery see your dealer retailer for one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for battery location Warning Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling 5 42 Vehicle Storage A CAUTION Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be baaly hurt if you are not careful See Jump Starting on page 5 43 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Infrequent Usage If the vehicle is driven infrequently remove the black negative cable from the battery This helps keep the battery from running down Extended Storage For extended storage of the vehicle remove the black negative cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger This helps maintain the charge of the battery over an extended period of time Jump Starting lfthe vehicle s battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely ACAUTION Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough
24. GCWR GVWR RGAWR Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight The only way to be sure it is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the vehicle and trailer Total Weight on the Vehicle s Tires Be sure the vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires These numbers can be found on the Certification Tire Label located on the B pillar below the door latch or see Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 for more information Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle or the GAWR including the weight of the trailer tongue If using a weight distributing hitch make sure not to go over the rear axle limit before applying the weight distribution spring bars Hitches It is important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying Hitches A Body to Ground Distance B Front of Vehicle When using a weight distributing hitch the hitch must be adjusted so that the distance A remains the same both before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle If pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than 4 000 Ibs 1 814 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when driving Always use a sway control if the trailer w
25. Messages on page 3 45 Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if driving under the best conditions the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally service the vehicle within 3 000 miles 5 000 km since the last service Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 22 for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL DIC message appears certain services checks and inspections are required Required services are described in the following for Maintenance I and Maintenance II Generally it is recommended that the first service be Maintenance I the second service be Maintenance II and then alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter However in some cases Maintenance II may be required more often Maintenance I Use Maintenance I if the message displays within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed Maintenance II Use Maintenance II if the previous service per
26. Power Steering If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops or the system is not functioning the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and vehicle speed While in a curve speed is the one factor that can be controlled If there is a need to reduce speed do it before entering the curve while the front wheels are straight Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you These problems can be avoided by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply the brakes See Braking on page 4 4 It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right dep
27. Press to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The inactive CD remains inside the radio for future listening CD Press to play a CD when listening to the radio The CD symbol displays when a CD is loaded AUTO EQ Automatic Equalization Press to select an equalization setting while playing a CD The equalization is set whenever a CD is played See AUTO EQ listed previously for more information If an EQ setting is selected for a CD it is activated each time a CD plays A Eject Press to eject a CD Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio off CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this button is pressed first 3 72 XM Radio Messages xL Explicit Language Channels These channels or any others can be blocked by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 Updating The encryption code in the receiver is being updated and no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No Signal The system is functioning correctly but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal When the vehicle is moved into an open area the signal should return No Signl The system is functioning correctly but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal When the vehicle is moved into an open area the signal should return Loading XM The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data No action is needed This message should disappear s
28. Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 12 Recreational Vehicle Towing 4 28 Reduced Engine Power Light sss 3 39 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System 2 4 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation 1o inienn rte adbuc tamen 2 5 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Mre EE 5 86 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 83 Replacement Bulbs seeeeess 5 55 Replacement Parts Maintenance 6 14 Replacement Windshield sssssss 5 56 Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government sssessssss 7 14 Kcti E EEES 7 14 United States Government 7 13 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems 1 66 Replacing Restraint System Parts Alter Crash cccsecceliniciatantubcese tacuieeeniaaebest 1 67 Retained Accessory Power ccecce 2 21 Roadside Assistance Program sclerosen eder nadana 7 6 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 4 21 Routing Engine Drive Belt 6 15 Running the Vehicle While Parked 2 31 Safety Belt Reminders ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 27 Safety Belts Care Of etes aet deri tot n REO oe ohare 5 100 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 15 Lap Shoulder Belt
29. Required Services on page 6 6 and Maintenance Footnotes on page 6 7 for further information ACAUTION Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt see your dealer retailer to have a qualified technician do the work See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5 4 Some maintenance services can be complex So unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment have your dealer retailer do these jobs When you go to your dealer retailer for service trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine parts Owner Checks and Services on page 6 8 tells what should be checked when to check it and what can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition The proper replacement parts fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 14 When the vehicle is serviced make sure these are used All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer retailer Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL DIC message displays service is required for the vehicle See DIC Warnings and
30. See Hear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 95 Rear Climate Control See Hear Climate Control System on page 3 23 Accessory Power Outlets See Accessory Power Outlet s on page 3 18 Ignition Switch See Ignition Positions on page 2 20 For vehicles with the center armrest compartment pull up on the latch handle located underneath the front edge to lift the cover 2 44 Luggage Carrier A CAUTION If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage carrier like paneling plywood or a mattress the wind can catch it while the vehicle is being driven This can cause a driver to lose control The item being carried could be violently torn off and this could cause a collision and damage the vehicle Items may be carried inside Never carry something longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of the vehicle The vehicle may be equipped with a luggage carrier that allows things to be loaded on top of the vehicle The luggage carrier if equipped has side rails attached to the roof and places to use for tying things down These allow for thing to be loaded on the vehicle as long as they are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier Crossrails can be purchased from your dealer retailer Notice Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 200 Ibs 91 kg or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle can damage the vehicle Load cargo so that it rests on th
31. The system then confirms the name provided The system responds with lt Phone name gt has been successfully paired after the pairing process is complete Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to be paired 3 75 Listing All Paired and Connected Phones 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say List The system lists all the paired Bluetooth devices If a phone is connected to the vehicle the system will say Is connected after the connected phone Deleting a Paired Phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Delete The system asks which phone to delete followed by a tone 4 Say the name of the phone to be deleted If the phone name is unknown use the List command for a list of all paired phones The system responds with Would you like to delete phone name Yes or No followed by a tone 5 Say Yes to delete the phone The system responds with OK deleting phone name gt 3 76 Linking to a Different Phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a
32. are above the tops of the seats CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to Towing Towing Your Vehicle To avoid damage the disabled vehicle should be towed with all four wheels off the ground Consult your dealer retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing following 4 27 Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground and dolly towing towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly The vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of its wheels on the ground If the vehicle must be towed see Towing Your Vehicle earlier in this section Notice Towing an all wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or even with only two of its wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain components Do no
33. but within the limit for RGAWR as well The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8 500 Ibs 8 856 kg 4 33 If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well 300 Ibs 136 kg could be added to the front axle weight and 400 Ibs 181 kg to the rear axle weight The vehicle now weighs 2 800 Ibs 1270kg 2 700 Ibs 1225kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Front 400 Ibs 181 kg Rear 6 200 Ibs 2812 kg Total Weight is still below 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg and you might think 700 additional pounds 318 kg should be subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within GCWR limits The maximum trailer would only be 7 800 Ibs 3 538 kg You may go further and think the tongue weight should be limited to less than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg to avoid exceeding GVWR But the effect on the rear axle must still be considered Because the rear axle now weighs 3 100 Ibs 1 406 kg 900 Ibs 408 kg can be put on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR The effect of tongue weight is about 1 5 times the actual weight Dividing the 900 Ibs 408 kg by 1 5 leaves only 600 Ibs 272 kg of tongue weight that can be handled 4 34 Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight expect that the largest trailer the vehicle can properly handle is 6 000 Ibs 2 721 kg It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings
34. conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts downshifts of the transmission When this happens a reduction in acceleration may be noticed or a noise or vibration may be heard This is normal If cruise control is being used when the system activates the StabiliTrak light will flash and cruise control will automatically disengage Cruise control may be reengaged when road conditions allow See Cruise Control on page 3 10 StabiliTrak will turn off automatically if a problem is detected in the system The StabiliTrak light will come on and SERVICE STABILITRAK will be displayed on the DIC If the SERVICE STABILITRAK message does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle see your dealer retailer for service Adding non GM accessories can affect the vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 for more information Limited Slip Rear Axle Vehicles with a limited slip rear axle can give more traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when traction is low this feature allows the drive wheel with the most traction to move the vehicle All Wheel Drive AWD System With this feature engine power is sent to all four wheels at all times This is like four wheel drive but there is no separate lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle It is fully automatic and adjusts itself as needed for road conditions Steering
35. format and content of this function will vary for each disc Fast Forward Press to fast forward the DVD or CD To stop fast forwarding press again This button might not work while the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 3 91 gt Play Pause Press to start play of a DVD or CD Press while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it Press again to continue the play of the DVD or CD When the DVD is playing press this button then press the fast forward button The DVD continues playing in a slow play mode To cancel slow play mode press this button gt Next Track Chapter Press to advance to the beginning of the next track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews Battery Replacement To change the remote control batteries 1 Remove the battery compartment door located on the bottom of the remote control 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Close the battery door securely If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place 3 92 Recommended Action No power Disc will not play The picture does not fill the screen There are black borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it looks stretched out The disc was eje
36. forward or rearward Keep in mind that as your seating position changes as it may during long trips so should the position of your lumbar support Adjust the seat as needed Heated Seats Your vehicle has heated front seats The buttons used to control this feature are located on the front door armrests The engine must be running for the heated seat feature to work Ele gu To heat the entire seat press the horizontal button with the heated seat and seatback symbol Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the heated seat off The indicator lights above the button will come on to designate the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low The low setting warms the seatback and seat cushion until the seat temperature is near body temperature The medium and high settings heat the seatback and seat cushion to a slightly higher temperature You will be able to feel heat in about two minutes To heat only the seatback press the vertical button with the heated seatback symbol An indicator light on the button will come on to designate that only the seatback is being heated Additional presses will cycle through the heat levels for the seatback only The feature will shut off automatically when the ignition is turned off Memory Seat On vehicles with this feature the controls for the memory function are located on the driver door
37. the way your vehicle performs including its braking ride and handling characteristics stability and resistance to rollover Additionally if your vehicle has electronic systems such as antilock brakes rollover airbags traction control and stability control the performance of these systems can be affected A CAUTION If you add different sized wheels your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury Only use Saab specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle and have them properly installed by a Saab certified technician See Buying New Tires on page 5 74 and Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 for additional information 5 76 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG System does not apply to deep tread winter type snow
38. tools before attempting any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If the wrong fasteners are used parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt lf doing some of your own service work use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can This vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 64 Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed See Maintenance Record on page 6 16 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the airflow around it This can cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance Check with your dealer retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of this vehicle To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Gasoline Octane Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher If the octane rating is less than 87 you might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive commonly referred to as spa
39. 3 41 Checking Things Under the Hood 5 10 Chemical Paint Spotting ssesssssse 5 104 Child Restraints Child Restraint Systems sssssss 1 35 Infants and Young Children 1 31 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 1 39 Older Children eese 1 28 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position 1 46 Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Rear Seat Position 1 48 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position 1 48 Where to Put the Restraint sss 1 38 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels esee 5 103 Exterior Lamps Lenses sseessee 5 101 Fabric Carpet ER 5 99 Finish Gare eese sese ee iret ride y 5 102 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces sss 5 100 lige EET 5 97 Cleaning cont leather cease cte e bonae aA 5 99 Mc c ER 5 104 Underbody Maintenance esses 5 104 Washing Your Vehicle ssssssss 5 101 Weatherstrips 2 2 0 ete ERER 5 100 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades 5 102 Climate Control System Climate Controls Personalization 3 24 Dual Automalic 1 eei secs ce rad ne anas 3 19 Outlet Adjustment sess 3 23
40. 6 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule sssssssss 6 2 Owner Checks and Services sssssss 6 8 aj fero Pres itela c Abernes 6 2 At Each Fuel Fill een 6 9 Maintenance Requirements esses 6 2 At Least Once a Month o on 6 9 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 At Least Once a Year ssssesseeeeeee 6 10 Using the Maintenance Schedule 6 2 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 12 Scheduled Maintenance ssssessss 6 4 Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 14 Additional Required Services 6 6 Engine Drive Belt Routing 6 15 Maintenance Footnotes seseessse 6 7 Maintenance Record ssesseeseees 6 16 6 1 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended Maintenance Requirements Notice Maintenance intervals checks inspections replacement parts and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep this vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition but also helps
41. Coolant Recovery Tank B Radiator Pressure Cap C Engine Fan ACAUTION An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan ACAUTION Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL can cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant could require changing sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in the vehicle 5 29 Engine Coolant The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX COOL This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low If there is a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating on page 5 34 What to Use A CAUTION Adding only plain water to the cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other
42. DIC display lf the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service See your dealer retailer SERVICE CHARGING SYS System This message displays if there is a problem with the battery charging system Under certain conditions the charging system light may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster See Charging System Light on page 3 30 The battery will not be charging at an optimal rate and the vehicle will lose the ability to enter the fuel economy mode The vehicle is safe to drive however you should have the electrical system checked by your dealer retailer SERVICE STABILITRAK lf this message displays it means there may be a problem with the StabiliTrak system If this message appears try to reset the system by performing the following stop turn off the engine then start the engine again If this message still comes on it means there is a problem You should see your dealer retailer for service The vehicle is safe to drive however you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak so reduce your speed and drive accordingly SERVICE TIRE MONITOR On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays if a part on the TPMS is not working properly The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the same ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Light on page 3 34 Several conditions may cause this message to appear See Tire Pres
43. Flat Tire Changing s 5 82 Flat Tire Storing eorr eres 5 94 Fluid Automatic Transmission esses 5 25 Power Steering sese 5 37 Windshield Washer 224222 5 38 Fog Lamp FOJ pm sene ES Eee T Re Een 3 15 Front Axle ss RE Eee sb idus 5 49 gi eee ETE 5 5 fito e pec 5 6 California Fuel 1 hives eter deter id 5 6 Check Gas Cap Light sssssess 3 41 Driving for Better Economy sssesses 4 2 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 5 10 Filling the Tank eese tette mere ERES 5 8 Fuels in Foreign Countries sssssss 5 7 Fuel cont Gago meae E E EE E 3 41 Gasoline Octane os usa ceia cn isee 5 5 Gasoline Specifications sssssss 5 5 Low Warning Light eeseseeeeenee 3 41 Fuses Engine Compartment Fuse Block 5 107 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 5 107 Rear Underseat Fuse Block 5 110 Windshield Wiper n 5 106 Gage Check Gages Warning Light 3 40 Engine Coolant Temperature 3 33 lj e 3 41 Oil Press Ure 2 2 oie separere 3 37 Speedometer sssssss 3 26 Tachometer eie tete eat erede ene excu 3 26 Voltmeter Gage seeem 3 30 Garage Door Opener sssseeese 2 38 Gasoline ee E 5 5 Speci
44. Help Center www saabusa com helpcenter FAQ Contact Us My GM Canada Canada www gm ca My GM Canada is a password protected section of www gm ca where you can save information on GM vehicles get personalized offers and use handy tools and forms with greater ease Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to My Showroom Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area My Dealers Retailers Save details such as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM dealers retailers My Driveway Access quick links to parts and service estimates check trade in values or schedule a service appointment by adding the vehicles you own to your driveway profile My Preferences Manage your profile and use tools and forms with greater ease To sign up visit the My GM Canada section within WWW gm ca Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs Saab has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with Saab by dialing 1 866 612 0380 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices Saab encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance However if a customer wishes to write or e mail Saab refer to the addresses below United States Customer Assistan
45. High Speed Operation ssessessss 5 66 Washing Your Vehicle seeesessse 5 101 Tire Pressure Monitor System 5 67 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 5 101 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 5 69 Finish Care HC 5 102 Tire Inspection and Rotation s 5 72 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades 5 102 When It Is Time for New Tires 5 73 Aluminum Wheels eeA 5 103 Buying New TII8S icio eiie eruere trend 5 74 Ice TEE 5 104 Different Size Tires and Wheels 5 76 Sheet Metal Damage eseeeees 5 104 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 5 76 Finish Damage icem reden 5 104 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 5 78 Underbody Maintenance eese 5 104 Wheel Replacement sess 5 79 Chemical Paint Spotting ssuusus 5 104 Tire Chains ssssee eee 5 80 Vehicle Identification ssssses 5 105 If a Tire Goes Flat 5 81 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 5 105 Changing a Flat Tire I 5 82 Service Parts Identification Label 5 105 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 83 EI ical S 5 106 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the ectrica ystem Mis iA ee S Spare Tire
46. Look for and use only an oil that meets Standard GM4718M For the proper viscosity see Engine Oil on page 5 18 Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Key Lock Part No U S 12346241 y in Canada 10953474 Chassis Chassis Lubricant meeting Lubrication requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Usage Fluid Lubricant Front Axle Rear Axle AUTO TRAK II Fluid Transfer Case Part No U S 12378508 in Canada 10953626 Hood Latch Assembly Secondary Latch Pivots Spring Anchor and Release Pawl SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant Part No U S 89021677 in Canada 89021678 meeting specifications SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant GM Part No U S 89021677 in Canada 89021678 meeting GM Specification 9986115 With a complete drain and refill add 5 5 ounces 163 ml of Limited Slip Axle Lubricant Additive GM Part No U S 1052358 in Canada 992694 where required See Rear Axle on page 5 48 Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Usage Fluid Lubricant Hood and Door Hinges Body Door Hinge Pins Liftgate Hinge and Linkage Folding Seats and Fuel Door Hinge Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot Points and Hinges Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Squeaks Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Part No U S 12346241 in Canada 10953474 Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Part No U S 12346241 in Canada 10953474
47. RAP is active Headphones The RSE system includes two sets of wireless headphones Each set of headphones has an ON OFF control An indicator light will illuminate on the headphones when they are on If the light does not illuminate the batteries may need to be replaced See Battery Replacement following for more information Each set of headphones has a volume knob To adjust the volume adjust this knob The transmitters are located below the video display screen The headphones will shut off automatically if they lose the signal from the system after about four minutes to save battery power The signal may be lost if the system is turned off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters When using the wired headphones if the front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six Disc CD or use XM Satellite Radio Service the audio for these sources is heard instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playing through the RSE Notice Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by the warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the headphones stored in a cool dry place Battery Replacement To change the batteries on the headphones 1 Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located on the left side of the headphones Slide the battery door open 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Make su
48. Re dial Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 After the tone say Re dial The system responds with Re dial using phone name gt and dials the last number called from the connected Bluetooth phone Once connected the person called will be heard through the audio speakers Receiving a Call When an incoming call is received the audio system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle Press and begin speaking to answer the call Call Waiting Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work Press to answer an incoming call when another call is active The original call is placed on hold Press again to return to the original call To ignore the incoming call continue with the original call with no action Three Way Calling Three Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work 1 While on a call press The System responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Three way call The system responds with Three way call please say dial or call 3 Use the dial or call command to dial the number of the third party to be called 4 Once the call is connected press to link all the callers together Ending a Call To end a call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone
49. Rental Vehicle Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty repair Rental reimbursement will be limited and must be supported by original receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state provincial local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information All program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel Saab reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Collision Damage Repair If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality repl
50. Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Send name tag The system responds with Say a name tag to send tones followed by a tone 3 Say the name tag to send f the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with OK Sending name tag gt and the dial tones are sent and the call continues f the system is not sure it recognized the name tag properly it responds Dial name tag Please say yes or no followed by a tone If the name tag is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Sending name tag gt and the dial tones are sent and the call continues Clearing the System Unless information is deleted out of the in vehicle Bluetooth system it will be retained indefinitely This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and phone pairing information For information on how to delete this information see the above sections on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags 3 83 Other Information The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference r
51. Tank See Cooling System on page 5 29 Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 24 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 38 Engine Oil Fill Cap Under Engine Cover See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 Engine Oil Dipstick Out of View See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick See Checking the Fluid Level under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5 25 Cooling System on page 5 29 Remote Negative Terminal Marked GND See Jump Starting on page 5 43 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 37 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 39 Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 5 107 Battery on page 5 42 Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine oil dipstick 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you do not do this the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 2 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then p
52. The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses one for each headlamp in the fuse block An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn off If this happens have your headlamp wiring checked right away Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem have it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can Engine Compart
53. The message turns off as soon as the conditions that caused the message to be displayed are no longer present TIGHTEN FUEL CAP This message may display and a chime may sound if the vehicle s fuel cap is not tightened properly Fully reinstall the fuel cap See Filling the Tank on page 5 8 3 50 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere This message remains on until it is manually cleared from the DIC display The DIC message is also cancelled if the ignition is turned off The DIC message and the Service Engine Soon light may come on again during a second trip if the fuel cap is still not tightened properly See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 34 for more information TRACTION CONTROL OFF This message displays when you momentarily press the StabiliTrak button located on the transmission shift handle In this mode stability control and the brake traction control are functional Engine speed management will be modified and the driven wheels can spin more freely For more details on this mode see StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 TURN SIGNAL ON This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn signal is left on for 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km Move the turn signal multifunction lever to the off position DIC Vehicle Customization Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to
54. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs Q What is wrong with this A The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not on the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you Q What is wrong with this A The belt is over an armrest A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this The belt would be much too high In a crash you can slide under the belt The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen not on the pelvic bones and that could cause serious or fatal injuries Be sure the belt goes under the armrests Q What is wrong with this ZN CAUTION You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and acros
55. Weatherstrip Lubricant Part No U S 3634770 in Canada 10953518 or Dielectric Silicone Grease Part No U S 12345579 in Canada 992887 Synthetic Grease with Teflon Superlube Part No U S 12371287 in Canada 10953437 Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer a Fr Number AGbeies Part Number Rear anes ems OOo Engine Drive Belt Routing 4 2L L6 Engine 5 3L V8 and 6 0L V8 Engines 6 15 Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided See Maintenance Requirements on page 6 2 Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6 8 can be added on the following record pages You should retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Odometer Maintenance I or i Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or i Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or z Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information 7 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 7 2 Online Owner Center csse 7 5 Customer A
56. a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top 1 26 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described previously in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guide squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide Slide the guide back onto its storage clip located between the interior body and the seatback or into the storage pocket on the side of the seat Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly 1 27 Safety Belt Extender If the safety belt will fasten around you you should use
57. ahead Watch for animals When tired pull off the road Do not wear sunglasses Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Keep your eyes moving especially during turns or curves No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver might need at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep standing or flowing water ACAUTION Wet brakes can cause crashes They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car vehicle wash lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces Driving through flowing water could cause your vehicle to be carried away If this happens you and other vehicle occupants could drown Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous Water can build up under your vehicle s tires so they actually ride on t
58. and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts or signs of wear Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc c Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace with genuine parts as needed To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year d Inspect wiper blades for wear cracking or contamination Clean the windshield and wiper blades if contaminated Replace wiper blades that are worn or damaged See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5 56 and Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades on page 5 102 for more information e Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety belt assemblies are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also see Checking the Restraint Systems on page 1 66 f Lubricate all key lock cylinders hood latch assembly secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl rear compartment hinges outer liftgate handle pivot points rear door detent link roller mechanism liftgate handle pivot points latch bolt fuel door
59. and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS 5 68 malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 69 for additional inf
60. as little dirt as possible 3 Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter 4 Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws Automatic Transmission Fluid ACAUTION i When to Check and Change Automatic Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off Transmission Fluid can cause you or others to be burned The air A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop level is when the engine oil is changed flames if the engine backfires If it is not there and Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the engine backfires you could be burned Do not Additional Required Services on page 6 6 and be sure drive with it off and be careful working on the to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended engine with the air cleaner filter off Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Notice If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into the engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you are driving 5 25 How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dealer retailer service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick Notice Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much
61. automatic equalization to select the equalization 5 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until a beep sounds When that numbered pushbutton is pressed the station that was set returns and the equalization that was selected is stored for that pushbutton 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone Bass Treble d Bass Treble Push and release until BASS or TREB treble displays then turn 2 to increase or to decrease the tone The display shows the bass or the treble level If a station is weak or has static decrease the treble To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position while in bass or treble push and hold One beep sounds To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold d2 when no tone or speaker control displays ALL CENTERED displays and a beep sounds AUTO EQ Automatic Equalization Press to select customized equalization settings designed for country western jazz talk pop rock and classical The equalization one through seven options are included only if the vehicle has the Bose system Press the AUTO EQ button to select equalization settings designed for equalization one through seven To return the bass and treble to the manual mode push and release d until BASS and TREB displays 3 61 Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade JJ Balance Fade To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers push and re
62. can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C At high speed for quite a while n heavy traffic especially in hot weather While pulling a trailer 5 26 To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200 F 82 C to 93 C Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it is colder than 50 F 10 C drive the vehicle in 3 Third until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off but this is used only as a reference Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50 F 10 C or more If it is colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to idle the engine longer Should the fluid level be low during this cold check you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid Checking the fluid hot will give a more accurate reading of the fluid level Checking the Fluid Level Prepare the vehicle as fol
63. electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you Notice Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work and it could damage the vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system Notice If the other vehicle s system is not a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you do not want You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transmission in P Park or a manual transmission in N Neutral before setting the parking brake If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is not in N Neutral 5 43 Notice If you leave the radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the warranty Always turn off the ra
64. end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable does not go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to the remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery Your vehicle has a remote negative terminal marked GND for this purpose 5 45 M rr 10 11 y Sd AG g Ea EA PEE NS 4 2L L6 Engine 5 3L V8 Engine shown 6 0L V8 Engine similar The remote negative terminal is located on the front engine lift bracket for the 4 2L L6 engine and on the accessory drive bracket for the 5 3L or 6 0L V8 engines Connect the other end of the negative cable to the remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery If it will not start after a few tries it probably needs service 5 46 Notice f the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal Jumper Cable Removal A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal B Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals C Dead Battery o
65. for information on data collection and use See also OnStar System on page 2 35 in this manual for more information Navigation System If your vehicle has a navigation system use of the system may result in the storage of destinations addresses telephone numbers and other trip information Refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions Radio Frequency Identification RFID RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door locking unlocking and starting and in vehicle transmitters for garage door openers RFID technology in Saab vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other Saab system containing personal information 42 NOTES 7 18 A Accessories and Modifications 5 3 Accessory Power Outlets 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 18 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Moe 1 65 Additives Fuel cccccccceceeceeeeeteeeeeteneeeenaees 5 6 Add On Electrical Equipment 5 106 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 2 22 Air Cleaner Filter Engine esses 5 24 Air Conditioning 2 crie eterne 3 19 Airbag Passenger Status Indicator 3 29 Readiness Light
66. have to replace 13 Use the wrench to tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown them be sure to get new original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications on page 5 113 for wheel nut torque specification 5 90 Secondary Latch System ACAUTION assembly equipped with a secondary latch system Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist lt is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling Someone standing too close during the procedure off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is could be injured by the jack If the spare tire does damaged For the secondary latch to work the tire must not slide off the jack completely make sure no be stored with the valve stem pointing up See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 94 for one is behind you or on either side of you as you instructions on storing the spare or flat tire correctly pull the jack out from the under spare To release the spare tire from the secondary latch Z CAUTION 1 Check under the w vehicle to see if the Before beginning this procedure read all the sable is visible iris instructions Failure to read and follow the not visible proceed instructions could damage the hoist assembly and to Step 6 you and others could get hurt Read and follo
67. hinge cargo door hinge locks and folding seat hardware More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak g Inspect hoses for cracks chafing leaks kinks and proper installation h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery Service i Drain flush and refill cooling system This service can be complex you should have your dealer retailer perform this service See Engine Coolant on page 5 30 for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and filler neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap j A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked Add fluid if needed K If driving regularly under dusty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change I Visually inspect belt for fraying excessive cracks or obvious damage Replace belt if necessary Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the int
68. is playing press the forward or the back arrow to fast forward or reverse Mute Voice Recognition For vehicles with OnStar or Bluetooth systems press to interact with those systems See OnStar System on page 2 35 and Bluetooth on page 3 74 in this manual for more information If the vehicle does not have OnStar press to silence the vehicle speakers only Press again or any other radio button to turn on the sound NXT Next Press to play a station that is programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons The radio only seeks preset stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band When a CD is playing in the CD changer press NXT to go to the next available CD if multiple CDs are loaded SRC Source Press to switch between FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 or a CD If a CD is loaded the CD symbol will appear on the display VOL Volume Press to increase or to decrease the volume 3 97 Radio Reception Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers vehicle convenience accessories and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet If there is interference or static unplug the item from the accessory power outlet AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other For better radio rece
69. is pressed move the shifter to the 3 Third position 2 Second This position reduces vehicle speed even more than 3 Third without using the brakes You can use 2 Second on hills It can help you control vehicle speed as you go down steep mountain roads while using the brakes off and on 2 26 To shift to the 2 Second position you must first press the large button on the shift handle While the button is pressed move the shifter to the 2 Second position You can also use 2 Second for starting the vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces 1 First This position reduces vehicle speed even more than 2 Second without using the brakes You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is put in 1 First while the vehicle is moving forward the transmission will not shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough To shift to the 1 First position you must first press the large button on the shift handle While the button is pressed move the shifter to the 1 First position Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place Parking Brake To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your fo
70. its features ACAUTION Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others Do not give extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving do the following while the vehicle is parked Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system Set up the tone speaker adjustments and preset radio stations For more information see Defensive Driving on page 4 2 Notice Contact your dealer retailer before adding any equipment Adding audio or communication equipment could interfere with the operation of the vehicle s engine radio or other systems and could damage them Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone equipment The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 21 for more information Setting the Clock Press and hold H until the correct hour and AM or PM displays Press and hold M until the correct minute displays The clock can be set with the ignition on or off 3 57 Radio s FEE wo o C s E ur am AUTO pw e IE Me s VOL
71. liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will The vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 5 30 Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant If using this mixture nothing else needs to be added This mixture e Gives freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C outside temperature Gives boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C engine temperature Protects against rust and corrosion Will not damage aluminum parts Helps keep the proper engine temperature Notice f an improper coolant mixture is used the engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Notice f extra inhibitors and or additives are used in the vehicle s cooling system the vehicle could be damaged Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 for more information Checking Coolant The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level Che
72. manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help call the Saab Customer Assistance Center in the U S at 1 800 955 9007 In Canada call Saab Customer Assistance Centre at 1 800 263 1999 English and French We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number VIN This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting Saab remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest following Step One first STEP THREE Both Saab and your Saab dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you can file with the Better Business Bureau BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive dispu
73. mode and increase fan speed Recirculation mode if selected will be cleared when the engine is turned off 3 22 Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window Gy Rear Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off An indicator light comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on The rear window defogger will turn off approximately 10 minutes after the button is pressed If additional warming time is needed press the button again The heated mirrors will also come on when the rear window defogger is turned on See Outside Heated Mirrors on page 2 34 Notice Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass These actions may damage the rear defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Outlet Adjustment Use the air outlets located in the center and on the sides of the instrument panel to direct the airflow Operation Tips Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice snow or any other obstruction such as leaves When entering the vehicle in cold weather select maximum blower speed for a few moments before driving This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of the window Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout the v
74. needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold Moving about to keep warm also helps If it takes some time for help to arrive now and then when you run the engine push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps Do this as little as possible to save fuel If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4 21 If the vehicle has a traction system it can often help to free a stuck vehicle Refer to the vehicle s traction System in the Index If stuck too severely for the traction System to free the vehicle turn the traction system off and use the rocking method 4 20 A CAUTION If you let your vehicle s tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured The vehicle can overheat causing an engine compartment fire or other damage Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer For information about using tire chains on the vehicle see Tire Chains on page 5 80 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Turn the ste
75. of Engine Oil to Use for more information Engine Oil Additives Engine Oil Flushes Do not add anything to the oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty 5 22 Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly the system must be reset every time the oil is changed When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it indicates that an oil change is necessary A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on in the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 45 Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if driving under the best conditions the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service people who will perform this work and reset the
76. off and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for those features In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag Airbags are designed to inflate only once After an airbag inflates you will need some new parts for the airbag system If you do not get them the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 7 15 and Event Data Recorders on page 7 16 Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly See your dealer retailer for service Passenger Sensing System The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible in the rearview mirror when the vehicle is started PASSENGER AIR BAG ez ON United States Ro Ri Canada The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off be visible during the system check When the system check is complete either the word ON or OFF or the will symbol f
77. on page 3 42 Windshield Washer on page 3 9 Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3 16 Hood Release on page 5 11 Dome Lamp Override on page 3 16 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2 22 Ozzr v caomo Tilt Wheel on page 3 6 Horn on page 3 6 Audio System s on page 3 57 Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 19 Shift Lever See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 24 Ignition Positions on page 2 20 Parking Brake on page 2 27 Accessory Power Outlet s on page 3 18 Cupholders on page 2 43 Glove Box on page 2 43 Hazard Warning Flashers A Hazard Warning Flasher Press this button located on the instrument panel to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off This warns others that you are having trouble Press A again to turn the flashers off Horn To sound the horn press the horn symbols on the steering wheel pad Tilt Wheel The tilt lever is on the outboard side of the steering column under the turn signal lever Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever toward you to change the position then release the lever to lock Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving 3 6 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following Turn and Lane Change Signals XX Headlamps WM D D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 2D Fog Lamps Cruise Control Flash To Pass Featu
78. power 2 20 The steering wheel can bind with the wheels turned off center If this happens move the steering wheel from right to left while turning the key to ACC ACCESSORY If this doesn t work then the vehicle needs service ACC ACC ACCESSORY This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories ON RUN This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories and to display some instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights The switch stays in this position when the engine is running If you leave the key in the ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN position with the engine off the battery could be drained You may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time Q START This position starts the engine When the engine starts release the key The ignition switch returns to ON RUN for driving A warning tone will sound when the driver door is opened the ignition is in ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF and the key is in the ignition Retained Accessory Power RAP These vehicle accessories may be used for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off Audio System DVD Player Power Windows Overhead console Sunroof if equipped These features work when the key is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY Once the key is turned from ON RUN to LOCK OFF these features will continue to work up to 10 minutes or until a door is opened Starting the Engi
79. restraint There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating to the vehicle A top tether anchor is built into the position that will accommodate a child restraint with vehicle The top tether attachment B on the child lower attachments B restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash 1 40 Your child restraint may have a single tether A or a dual tether C Either will have a single attachment B to secure the top tether to the anchor Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached Others require the top tether always to be attached In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint lf the child restraint does not have a top tether one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations 2 Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors Second Row To assist you in locating the lower anchors each seating position with lower anchors has two labels near the crease between the seatback and the
80. road hazards A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to your vehicle This label shows your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle s maximum load carrying capacity For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label see Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort Never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare tire See Spare Tire on page 5 97 for additional information 5 65 How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommen
81. seat heaters or seat massagers Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1 48 1 62 5 If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit turn the vehicle off Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion if adjustable to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint See Head Restraints on page 1 7 Restart the vehicle If the on indicator is still lit with an infant present in a child restraint secure the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer retailer If the Off Indicator is Lit for an If this happens use the following steps to allow the Adult Size Occupant system to detect that person and enable the right front passenger frontal airbag 1 Turn the vehicle off 2 Remove any additional material from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers 3 Place the seatback in the fully upright position 4 Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with legs comfortably extended 5 Restart the vehicle and have the p
82. sounds and the indicator light located to the right of the slot flashes and EJECT ALL displays 2 Once the light stops flashing and turns green REMOVE CD displays The CD ejects and can be removed Once the CD is removed the indicator light flashes again and another CD ejects To stop ejecting the CDs press the LOAD or the eject button If the CD is not removed after 25 seconds the CD automatically pulls back into the player If CD is pushed back into the player before the 25 second time ends the player senses an error and tries to eject the CD several times before stopping Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a CD after it is pushed in manually The player s 25 second eject timer resets at each press of the eject button causing the player to not eject the CD until the 25 second time period has elapsed Care of CDs Sound quality can be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled Handle them carefully Store CD R s in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc If the surface of a CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD does not play properly or not at all Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it this could damage the surface Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
83. the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Universal Home Remote System Operation With One Triangular LED If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode LED indicator light above the Universal Home Remote buttons follow the instructions below This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home automation devices Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Universal Home Remote Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in the programming the Universal Ho
84. the RKE transmitter LOCK FEEDBACK HORN The horn will chirp the second time you press the button with the lock symbol on the RKE transmitter To select a setting and move on to the next feature press EK while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC Unlock Feedback Press Ef until UNLOCK FEEDBACK LAMPS appears in the display To select your preference for the feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter press lt while UNLOCK FEEDBACK LAMPS is displayed on the DIC Pressing will scroll through the following settings UNLOCK FEEDBACK LAMPS default The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the RKE transmitter UNLOCK FEEDBACK HORN The horn will chirp the second time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the RKE transmitter UNLOCK FEEDBACK BOTH The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the RKE transmitter and the horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock button UNLOCK FEEDBACK OFF There will be no feedback when unlocking the vehicle To select a setting and move on to the next feature press 4 while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC Headlamp Delay Press Ef until HEADLAMP DELAY 10 SEC appears in the display To select your preference for how long the headlamps will stay on after you turn off the vehicle pr
85. the chosen speed and stays there If the switch is held at resume accelerate the vehicle will keep going faster until the switch is released or the brake is applied So unless you want the vehicle to go faster do not hold the switch at resume accelerate Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed Press K at the end of the lever then release the button and the accelerator pedal The vehicle will now cruise at the higher speed If the accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds cruise control will turn off e Move the cruise switch from to Hold it there until the desired speed is reached and then release the switch To increase the vehicle speed in small amounts move the switch briefly to resume accelerate Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control Press in the button at the end of the lever until the lower desired speed is reached then release it To slow down in very small amounts briefly press the set button Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle s speed When you take your foot off the pedal the vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed set earlier Using Cruise Control on Hills Ho
86. the edge of the hole and the outer edge If the surface of a CD is soiled take a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water and clean it Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD Care of the CD and DVD Player Do not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism Notice If a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If an error displays see CD Messages later in this section 14 Fast Reverse Press to fast reverse within the track 2 D gt Fast Forward Press to fast forward within the track 3 65 Repeat With the repeat setting one track or an entire CD can be repeated To use repeat To repeat the current track press and rel
87. the fuel pump unattended when refueling the vehicle This is against the law in some places Do not re enter the vehicle while pumping fuel Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver side of the vehicle To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly counterclockwise While refueling hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door ACAUTION Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly burned This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 101 When replacing the fuel cap turn it clockwise until it clicks Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic System can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 34 There may also be a light that comes on in the instrument panel to let you know if the gas cap is not properly installed See Check
88. the next feature press X while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC If you accidentally choose a language that you do not want or understand press and hold and the trip information button at the same time The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages in their particular language English will be in English Francais will be in French and Espanol will be in Spanish When you see the language that you would like release both buttons The DIC will then display the information in the language you chose You can also scroll through the different languages by pressing and holding the trip reset stem for four seconds as long as you are in the odometer mode 3 56 Units Press until UNITS U S ENGLISH appears in the display To select the units of measurement in which the DIC will display vehicle information press lt lt while UNITS U S ENGLISH is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt will scroll through the following settings UNITS U S ENGLISH default All information will be displayed in English units UNITS METRIC km L All information will be displayed in metric units UNITS METRIC L 100 km All information will be displayed in metric units To select a setting and exit out of the customizable options press Ef while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC Audio System s Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the following pages to become familiar with
89. time is about three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in three fourths of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road whether it is wet dry or icy tire tread the condition of the brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake The brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot of heavy braking Keeping pace with the traffic and allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven brake normally but do not pump the brakes If the brakes are pumped the pedal could get harder to push down If the engine stops there will still be some power
90. tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Z WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 5 77 Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resis
91. to do to help avoid the damage There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use the same words CAUTION or Notice Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator I This symbol is shown when you need to see your owner manual for additional instructions or information This symbol is shown when you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or information Vehicle Symbol Chart B Fuel Gage Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean For more information on the symbol refer to the index Fuses SB Headlamp High Low Beam Changer i SY Adjustable Pedals LATCH System Child Restraints me Apad Readiness Ont C Malfunction Indicator Lamp X Air Conditioning Y Oil Pressure amp Antilock Brake System ABS D Power MA t Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar Q Remote Vehicle Start Q ing Ligh Brake system Warning Light Safety Belt Reminders Charging System tz Tire Pressure Monitor amp Cruise Control Wu Traction Control E Engine Coolant Temperature E3 Windshield Washer Fluid XX Exterior Lamps 30 Fog Lamps Section 1 Seats and Restraint System Front Seats 52
92. tone 3 Say Change phone The system responds with Please wait while search for other phones f another phone is found the response will be Phone name is now connected f another phone is not found the original phone remains connected Storing Name Tags The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and OnStar systems The system uses the following commands to store and retrieve phone numbers Store Digit Store Directory Using the Store Command The store command allows a phone number to be stored without entering the digits individually 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Store The system responds with Store number please followed by a tone 3 Say the complete phone number to be stored at once with no pauses Ifthe system recognizes the number it responds with OK Storing and repeats the phone number fthe system is unsure it recognizes the phone number it responds with Store and repeats the number followed by Please say yes or no If the number is correct say Yes If the number is not correct say No The system will ask for the number to be re entered 4 After the system stores the phone number it responds with Please say the name tag followed by a tone 5 Say a name tag for the phone number The name tag is recorded and the system
93. toward the front of the vehicle 3 Turn the ignition key to LOCK OFF 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave the vehicle with the key the vehicle is in P Park 2 28 Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine Running A CAUTION It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running be sure the vehicle is in P Park and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you have moved the shift lever into P Park hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from P Park without first pressing the button on the console shift lever If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into P Park Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the transmission into P Park properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of P Park This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into P Park properly before you leave the driver
94. vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle And if you do have a heavy load you should spread it out Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs and capacity weights Please note your vehicle s Certification Tire label or consult your dealer for additional details A CAUTION Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on the vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your vehicle s weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way Notice Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not overload your vehicle If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they will keep going ACAUTION Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them
95. vehicle tires properly inflated Combine several trips into a single trip Replace the vehicle s tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire s sidewall near the size Follow recommended scheduled maintenance A CAUTION Assume that other road users pedestrians bicyclists and other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do and be ready In addition Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you Focus on the task of driving Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or possible death These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunk Driving ACAUTION Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you are with a group designate a driver who will not drink Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle judgment muscular coordination vision and attentiveness Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinki
96. washer However the rear window washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer If windshield can be washed but not the rear window check the fluid level Headlamp Washer For vehicles with headlamp washers they clear debris from the headlamp lenses by soaking the lens with fluid waiting for about five seconds then rinsing away the loose debris The headlamp washers are located under the headlamps The headlamp washers activate for one wash wait rinse cycle when the front windshield washer button is pressed for the first time after the vehicle is turned on The headlamps washers then activate automatically for one cycle after every four front windshield washes The headlamps must be on to be washed If the headlamps are off only the front windshield will be washed The headlamp washers use the same fluid bottle as the windshield washer However the headlamp washers will run out of fluid before the windshield washer If the windshield can be washed but not the headlamps check the fluid level See Windshield Washer on page 3 9 for more information Cruise Control With cruise control a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h If the brakes are applied the cruise control shuts off A CAUTION Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed S
97. wear your safety belt even with airbags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with roof rail airbags A CAUTION Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 1 28 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 31 There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 28 for more information 1 53 Where Are the Airbags The right front passenger s frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side The driver s frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 54 2 lt Driver Side shown Passenger Side similar The roof rail airbags for the driver right front passenger and second row outboa
98. would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without safety belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Put someone on it Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider does not stop The person keeps going until stopped by something In a real vehicle it could be the windshield or the instrument panel or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q A er Q Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if am wearing a safety belt You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted And you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you are upside down If my vehicle has airbags why should I have to wear Safety belts Airbags are supplemental systems only so they work
99. 2009 Saab 9 7X Owner Manual LL Seats and Restraint System 1 1 Driving Your Vehicle 0ccceeeeeeeeeeees 4 1 Front Sesls uisi senten degere renee 1 2 Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle 4 2 Rear Seats ssec 1 8 TOWING M 4 27 Safety Belts secedere eite ime gos 1 10 Service and Appearance Care 5 1 Child Restraints csse 1 28 rrnup M 5 3 Airbag System Bee sence cea ashi SEES TEE DEERE ERE 1 52 Fuel Qe pure eseesesenesenememee nennen nennen 5 5 Restraint System Check susueussse 1 66 Checking Things Under the Hood 9 10 All Wheel Drive eeseseeemmm 5 47 Features and Controls eee enn Rear Axle ecccceseccceseeeeessetseeceeeeeentntrneess 5 48 p a Mc M MM C E col wae nara rs cence eet ees UREROREUR 5 49 d s 9S c MR ee Headlamp Aiming sese 5 50 WindOWS ssssee Immer 2 13 Bulb Replacement se 5 50 Theft Deterrent Systems BESS RENSEDE 2 16 Windshield Replacement 1 5 56 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 19 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement _ 5 56 Milligort cH 2 32 ul S 5 59 e MEL amm 2 35 Appearance Care sse 5 97 Universal Home Remote System 2 38 Vehicle Identification 2 5 105 Storage Areas E 2 43 Electrical System s 5 106 Moonroof
100. 29 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 Remote Negative Terminal Marked GND See Jump Starting on page 5 43 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 39 Battery on page 5 42 Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 5 107 When you open the hood on the 5 3L V8 engine here is what you will see OR 5 14 Engine Coolant Recovery Tank See Cooling System on page 5 29 Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 24 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 38 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick See Checking the Fluid Level under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5 25 Engine Oil Dipstick See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 Cooling System on page 5 29 Remote Negative Terminal Marked GND See Jump Starting on page 5 43 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 37 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 39 Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 5 107 Battery on page 5 42 Engine Coolant Recovery
101. AE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS HOT WEATHER FIT C LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL AND GM STANDARD GM6094M GASOLINE ENGINES DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED COLD WEATHER GM6094M Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M 5 20 SAE 5W 30 SAE 5W 30 is best for the vehicle These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 American Petroleum Institute API starburst symbol Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Notice Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty For 6 0L V8 VIN Code H Engine Vehicles Only Look for three things RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS HOT WEATHER FIT C LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL AND GM STANDARD GM4718M BIGASOLINE fa ENGINES AI DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED COLD WEATHER GM4718M This vehicle s engine requires a special oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M Oils meeting this standard may be identified as synthetic However not all synt
102. Ask a dealer retailer in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice on this 2 23 Active Fuel Management 7M If the vehicle has a 5 3L V8 engine it has Active Fuel Management This system allows the engine to operate on either all or half of its cylinders depending on driving conditions When less power is required such as cruising at a constant vehicle speed the system will operate in the half cylinder mode allowing the vehicle to achieve better fuel economy When greater power is required such as accelerating from a stop passing or merging onto a freeway the system will maintain full cylinder operation Automatic Transmission Operation There are several different positions for the gear shift lever 2 24 P Park This position locks the rear wheels It is the best position to use when you start the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily A CAUTION It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park See Shifting Into Park on page 2 28 If you are pulling a trailer see Tow
103. ERROR 1 2 Power Seals osbornei tete uietie s eere aignese 1 2 Power Lutmbar eorr tei iren cte bg Denia dia 1 2 Heated Seats cccceeeeeeeee eanan iE 1 3 Memory Seal 53 osea Ee iirin aaeei 1 3 Power Reclining Seatbacks sss 1 5 Head Restraints 1 eec 1 7 Rear Seats ssssssssssss 1 8 Rear Seat Operation sesseeesessss 1 8 Safety Belts ssssssssse 1 10 Safety Belts They Are for Everyone 1 10 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 15 Lap Shoulder Belt sseeess 1 23 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 27 Safety Belt Extender sseseeesess 1 28 Child Restraints sseseesense 1 28 Older Children sese 1 28 Infants and Young Children ssss 1 31 Child Restraint Systems ssssssesse 1 35 Where to Put the Restraint sssssssse 1 38 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH M T 1 39 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position 1 46 Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Rear Seat Position 1 48 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position 1 48 Airbag System ssesssss 1 52 Where Are the Airbags sssesesessse 1 54 When Should an Ai
104. Entry RKE System 2 4 New Vehicle Break In ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 19 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System IGNITION POSITIONS 2222 2 oar err bn ete EEG 2 20 Operation MER 2 5 Retained Accessory Power RAP 2 21 Doors and LOCKS cccceceeeccccceeceeeeeaeaeee ees 2 7 Starting the Engine sse 2 21 Door LOCKS DERE DE 2 7 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 2 22 Power Door Locks 2222 Enke 2 8 Engine Coolant Heater sssseeeee 2 23 Delayed Locking cccccecccseeceeeeeceeneceuneeees 2 8 Active Fuel Management pee 2 24 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 9 Automatic Transmission Operation 2 24 Rear Door Security Locks eeseee 2 11 Parking Brake oieee isien RDerPiAU RU 2 27 Lockout Protection eee 2 11 Shifting Into Park 22222222 user ener r rn drnne 2 28 Liftgate Liftglass eeecee 3 19 Shifting Out of Park sssr 2 29 Windows 2 13 Parking Over Things That Burn 2 30 Power de ud ar Nike ER s c ee 2 SUD VIBSOLS saccarssctechetadtaara team itsreesee css coacude tas 2 15 Rurining the vehicle Vuile Parked Fal MINT ONS ir erepto Renee 2 32 ra MR cil SOS acc aaa AN Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror 2 32 PASS Key III Electronic Immobilizer 2 17 ne Mp d m PASS Kev IIl Electronic Immobilizer i UC y Outside Convex Mirror
105. Gas Cap Light on page 3 41 for more information ZN CAUTION If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immediately Notice f you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer retailer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 34 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood Z CAUTION ZN CAUTION Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor You can be badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others Dispense fuel only into approved containers coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things Do not fill a container while it is inside a that will burn onto a hot engine vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before ope
106. Genuine Saab parts or recycled original Saab parts Remember recycled parts will not be covered by your Saab vehicle warranty Insurance pays the bill for the repair but you must live with the repair Depending on your policy limits your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts Discuss this with your repair professional and insist on Genuine Saab parts Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine Saab parts even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost If another party s insurance company is paying for the repairs you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company s collision policy repair limits as you have no contractual limits with that company In such cases you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Saab If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual proble
107. Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys ACAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 59 for additional information If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 39 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 39 for top tethe
108. OL coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck 8 Then replace the pressure cap At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck reinstall the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight and fully seated 5 34 Notice If the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured Radiator Pressure Cap Notice If the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for information on location Engine Overheating The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on the vehicle s instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 33 for more information If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC the display will show an Engine Coolant Hot Engine Overheated message See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 45 for more information You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning appears but instead get service help right away See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 If you do decide to lift the hood make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running If the engine i
109. Off In this mode stability control and brake traction control are functional Engine speed management will be modified and the driven wheels can spin more freely This can cause the brake traction control to activate more frequently If the controller detects excessive wheel spin in this mode the StabiliTrak indicator light may blink and the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message may be displayed to warn the driver that damage may occur to the transfer case StabiliTrak Off In this mode both stability control and part of the traction control system are disabled The vehicle will still have brake traction control but will not be able to use the engine speed management system System noises maybe heard as a result of the brake traction control coming on If the controller detects excessive wheel spin in this mode the StabiliTrak indicator light may blink and the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message may be displayed to warn the driver that damage may occur to the transfer case It is recommended to leave the system on for normal driving conditions but it may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you may want to rock the vehicle in an attempt to free it It may also be necessary to turn off the system when driving in extreme off road conditions where high wheel spin is required See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 20 for more information The following chart descri
110. Organic solvents such as naptha alcohol etc that can damage the vehicle s interior Fabric Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats For any soil always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda Before cleaning gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques For liquids gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed For solid dry soils remove as much as possible and then vacuum To clean 1 Saturate a lint free clean white cloth with water or club soda 2 Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture 3 Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 4 Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean 5 If the soil is not completely removed use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water If any of the soil remains a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used test a small hidden area for colorfastness first If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring
111. Press either arrow to stop scanning To scan all loaded CDs on a Radio with Six Disc CD player press and hold either arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN displays and a beep sounds Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of each loaded CD Press either arrow again to stop scanning DISP Display Press to see how long the current track has been playing The elapsed time of the track appears on the display To change the default on the display track or elapsed time press this button until the desired option displays then hold the button for two seconds One beep sounds and the selected display becomes the default BAND Press to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The inactive CD remains inside the radio for future listening CD Press to play a CD when listening to the radio The CD symbol displays when a CD is loaded AUTO EQ Automatic Equalization Press to select an equalization setting while playing a CD The equalization is set whenever a CD is played See AUTO EQ listed previously for more information If an EQ setting for a CD is selected it is activated each time a CD plays Playing an MP3 CD R Disc The vehicle s radio system may have the MP3 feature If it has this feature it is capable of playing an MP3 CD R disc For more information on how to play an MP3 CD R disc see Using an MP3 on page 3 66 later in this section CD Messages CHECK CD If this messag
112. Reame d EE 3 23 Glock Selling uie eres Rue nca pee ees NDS 3 57 Collision Damage Repair sees 7 10 COMPASS I 2 32 Content Theft Deterrent ssssseessss 2 16 Control of a Vehicle ssssesseeseeeeee 4 3 Coolant p qe 5 30 Engine Temperature Gage sss 3 33 Cooling System 2 1 2 cepe rear daer 5 29 Cruise Control essssssssseseeeereee 3 10 Cruise Control Light seeee 3 38 Gupholders ERAN 2 43 Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation cceeeeeeneeeeeeee ees 7 9 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users sssssss 7 6 Customer Assistance Offices ssss 7 6 Customer Assistance Information cont Customer Satisfaction Procedure 7 2 Reporting Safety Defects to Saab 7 14 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government ssssss 7 14 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government 7 13 Roadside Assistance Program 7 6 Service Publications Ordering Information 7 14 Daytime Running Lamp eene 3 14 Defensive Driving cecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Delayed Locking oce te entes 2 8 DISC i ee TD EE 3 68 Doing Your Own Service Work ss 5 4 Dome Lamp Override
113. Tao aa scene 3 34 Lighting EMV ee Er m 3 16 OW aH 3 17 Lights es e Pe E e mex sane FERE hd 3 13 Flashsto PasS i idiot ee exe ure A TYeEFP rA EDI 3 8 High Low Beam Changer sesssessss 3 7 Om Reminder coe tuner dir nede inh 3 14 Limited Slip Rear Axle sees 4 10 Loading Your Vehicle eeeeeeeeees 4 21 Lockout Protection eee 2 11 Locks Delayed Locking eese 2 8 BORE ROTER 2 7 Lockout Protection essere 2 11 Power DOOM cei cre ror ene Ra ea aa e RU va Ear 2 8 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 9 Rear Door Security Locks sssssss 2 11 Loss of Control eese 4 12 Low Fuel Warning Light sssseesssesse 3 41 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 1 39 Luggage Carrier ess 2 44 Lumbar Power Controls cessesee e 1 2 Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services sss 6 6 At Each Fuel Fill ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 9 At Least Once a Month sssseesess 6 9 At Least Once a Year ssesssssessssee 6 10 Introduction ns 6 2 Maintenance Footnotes ssseeesssss 6 7 Maintenance Record esses 6 16 Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 14 Maintenance Requirements
114. These buttons are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver s seating position and the adjustable pedals if equipped The settings for these features can be saved for up to two drivers To store the memory settings 1 Adjust the driver s seat including the seatback recliner and lumbar and the adjustable pedals if equipped to the desired position See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2 22 for more information 2 Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory control for three seconds A double chime will sound to let you know that the position has been stored To repeat the procedure for a second driver follow the preceding steps but press the other numbered memory control button To recall the memory settings Press and release button 1 or 2 while the vehicle is in PARK P A single chime will sound and the memory position will be recalled f programmed to do so through the Driver Information Center DIC pressing the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will recall the preset driver s memory seat and adjustable pedals position f programmed to do so through the DIC placing the key in the ignition will recall the driver s memory seat and adjustable pedals positions See Seat Recall under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 51 for more information To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at any time press one of the memory buttons or power seat co
115. XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message is received after having your vehicle serviced check with your dealer retailer Radio ID If tuned to channel 0 there could be a receiver fault this message will alternate with the XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate the service Consult with your dealer retailer Unknown If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there could be a receiver fault Consult with your dealer retailer Chk XMRevr If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver may have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer Check XM If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer 3 73 Navigation Radio System For vehicles with a navigation radio system see the separate Navigation System manual Bluetooth Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and receive phone calls The system can be used while the key is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY position The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft 9 1 m Not all phones support all functions and not all phones are guaranteed to work with the in vehicle Bluetooth system See gm com bluetooth for more information on compatible phones Voice Recognition The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret voice comman
116. ability messages see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 45 When the StabiliTrak system is both on and actively controlling the stability of the vehicle the StabiliTrak light will blink for the duration of the event s ee The system may be heard or felt while it is working This is normal A The StabiliTrak system has three modes of operation STABILITRAK ON TRACTION CONTROL OFF and STABILITRAK OFF STABILITRAK ON The vehicle will default to STABILITRAK ON every time the driver starts the vehicle The StabiliTrak light will be off and no DIC messages will be displayed The StabiliTrak disable button is located on the transmission shift handle TRACTION CONTROL OFF The driver can modify the engine speed management system by momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak button on the transmission shift handle The StabiliTrak light will come on and TRACTION CONTROL OFF will be displayed Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak button again will return the system to the STABILITRAK ON mode STABILITRAK OFF The driver can turn off StabiliTrak by pressing the StabiliTrak button for more than five seconds The StabiliTrak light will come on and STABILITRAK OFF will be displayed For vehicles without a DIC the StabiliTrak indicator light will come on Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak button again will return the system to the STABILITRAK ON mode See StabiliTrak Off below for more information Traction Control
117. abrasives as they can damage the paint metal or plastic on the vehicle Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer Follow all manufacturers directions regarding correct product usage necessary safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product Rinse the vehicle well before washing and after to remove all cleaning agents completely If they are allowed to dry on the surface they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle Avoid using high pressure washes closer than 12 inches 30 cm to the surface of the vehicle Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 107 5 101 Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer If the vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish
118. acement later in this section Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the function of the remote control Notice Storing the remote control in a hot area or in direct sunlight can damage it and the repairs will not be covered by the warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the remote control stored in a cool dry place 3 90 Remote Control Buttons D Power Press to turn the DVD player on and off T Title Press to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD A V lt P Menu Navigation Arrows Use the arrows to navigate through a menu L Set up Menu Press to adjust the color tint brightness contrast display mode and dynamic range compression The dynamic range compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase low audio produced by some DVDs 2 Audio Press to display a menu that only appears while a DVD is being played The format and content of this function will vary for each disc Fast Reverse Press to fast reverse the DVD or CD To stop fast reversing press again This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews SRCE Source Press to switch between the DVD player and an auxiliary source E Stop Press to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD or CD Press twice to return to the beginning of the DVD 4 Previous Track Chapter Press to return to the start of th
119. acement parts Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your vehicle s resale value and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions Collision Parts Genuine Saab Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built Genuine Saab Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle s designed appearance durability and safety are preserved The use of Genuine Saab parts can help maintain your Saab New Vehicle Warranty Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes In most cases the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle A recycled original equipment Saab part may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle s originally designed appearance and safety performance however the history of these parts is not known Such parts are not covered by your Saab New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any related failures are not covered by that warranty Aftermarket collision parts are also available These are made by companies other than Saab and may not have been tested for your vehicle As a result these parts may fit poorly exhibit premature durability corrosion problems and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions Aftermarket parts are not covered by your Saab New Vehicle Li
120. ad For safety slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance is longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You might not realize the surface is slippery until the vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any Antilock Brake System ABS helps avoid only the braking skid Off Road Driving Your vehicle does not have features like added ground clearance special underbody shielding and a transfer case low gear range things that are necessary for extended or severe off road service You should not drive off road unless you are on a level solid surface Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Night driving tips include Drive defensively Do not drink and drive Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside rearview mirror Slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles because headlamps can only light up so much road
121. ail airbags the word AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts Even though today s airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job 1 52 Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system ZN CAUTION You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt even if you have airbags Airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them Also airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 1 56 Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person ACAUTION Airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye Anyone who is up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Do not sit unnecessarily close to the airbag as you would be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always
122. ailering capacity of the vehicle read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling acceleration braking durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly The following information has many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before pulling a trailer 4 29 Pulling A Trailer Here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure the rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you will be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control See Hitches later in this section Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Vehicles with an automatic transmissions can tow in D Drive Shift the transmission to a lo
123. album Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less Make sure to finalize the disc while burning an MP3 disc using multiple sessions It is usually better to burn the disc all at once 3 68 The player is able to read and play a maximum of 50 folders 50 playlists 10 sessions and 255 files Long file names folder names or playlist names can use more disc memory space than necessary To conserve space on the disc minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names An MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders can also be played The system can support up to 11 folders in depth though keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in order to keep down the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback If a CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders 50 playlists 10 sessions and 255 files the player allows access and navigates up to the maximum but all items over the maximum will not play Root Directory The root directory is treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders However playlists Px are always accessed before root folders or files Empty Directory or Folder lf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed fil
124. an Airbag Inflates After the frontal airbags inflate they quickly deflate so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated Roof rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes For location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 1 57 The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the 1 58 deflated airbags Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle A CAUTION When an airbag inflates there may be dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment you should seek medical attention The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors turn the interior lamps on and turn the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate You can lock the doors turn the interior lamps
125. an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no child is in it Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint Z CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint 1 37 Where to Put the Restraint According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child restraint in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if t
126. and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have left the program mode If this occurs repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1 to re enter the programming mode You can exit the program mode any time by turning the ignition to ON RUN The locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you are leaving the program mode If the lock unlock switches are not pressed while in the programming mode the current auto lock unlock setting will not be modified See your dealer for more information Rear Door Security Locks Your vehicle may have this feature You can lock the rear doors so they cannot be opened from the inside by passengers To use one of these locks do the following 1 Open one of the rear doors You will find a security lock lever located on the inside edge of each rear door 2 Move the lever down to engage the security lock Move the lever up to disengage the security lock y a amp 5 3 Close the door The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from the inside while this feature is in use If you want to open the rear door while the security lock is on unlock the door and open the door from the outside Lockout Protection This feature stops the power door locks from locking when the key is in the ignition and a door is open to protect you from locking your key in the vehicle If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is ope
127. arefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the road creating less traction or grip Wet ice can occur at about 32 F 0 C when freezing rain begins to fall resulting in even less traction Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand Drive with caution whatever the condition Accelerate gently so traction is not lost Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick so there is even less traction Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more The Antilock Brake System ABS on page 4 5 improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement Allow greater following distance on any slippery road and watch for slippery spots Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice Turn off cruise control if equipped on slippery surfaces 4 18 Blizzard Conditions Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby If possible use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe Turn on the Hazard Warning Fl
128. ark consult your dealer retailer or a professional towing service 2 29 Parking Over Things That Burn A CAUTION Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn Engine Exhaust ZN CAUTION Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death CAUTION Continued 2 30 CAUTION Continued Exhaust may enter the vehicle if The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation parking garages tunnels deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage The vehicle s exhaust system has been modified damaged or improperly repaired There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or after market modifications that are not completely sealed If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle Drive it only with the windows completely down Have the vehicle repaired immediately Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation Running the Vehicle While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to kn
129. as ended can overheat and damage the cranking motor and drain the battery Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to let the cranking motor cool down 2 21 2 If the engine does not start after 5 10 seconds especially in very cold weather below 0 F or 18 C it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds Wait atleast 15 seconds between each try to allow the cranking motor to cool down When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again repeat these steps This clears the extra gasoline from the engine Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts Notice The engine is designed to work with the electronics in the vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer retailer If you do not the engine might not perform properly Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty 2 22 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal If the vehicle has this feature you can change the position of the throttle and brake pedals The vehicle must be in P Park for this feature to operate The switch used to adjus
130. ashers on page 3 6 Tie ared cloth to an outside mirror A CAUTION Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle This may cause exhaust gases to get inside Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death If the vehicle is stuck in the snow Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe Check again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Open a window about two inches 5 cm on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind to bring in fresh air Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that circulates the air inside the vehicle and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 2 30 Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You cannot see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust Run the engine for short periods only as needed to keep warm but be careful To save fuel run the engine for only short periods as
131. at option 3 Press the enter button to select Video Format 4 Press the right or left arrow button to select the desired video format 5 Press the enter button to accept the change 3 86 Audio Output Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be heard through the following possible sources Wireless Headphones Vehicle Speakers Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat Audio system if equipped The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to the wireless headphones if there is audio available See Headphones earlier in this section for more information The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the vehicle speakers by using the radio The RSE system may be selected as an audio source on the radio if the RSE system power is on Once the RSE system is selected as an audio source on the radio adjust the speaker volume on the radio if necessary If the RSE system power is not on the RSE system will not be an available source on the radio Refer to the radio information for the radio that the vehicle has for more information The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system if equipped The RSE system can be selected as an audio source on the rear seat audio system if the RSE system power is on See Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 95 for more information Video Screen The video screen is located in the overhead console To us
132. auo KOR lt v Hov oco d Passenger P Metric Tire A Tire Size The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail 5 60 B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards D Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture E Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread F Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 76 G Max
133. ays check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure described previously Consistency repeatable readings is important to maintaining proper fluid level If inconsistent readings persist contact your dealer retailer How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while itis hot A cold check is used only as a reference If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check It does not take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Do not overfill 5 28 Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid earlier in this section When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place Cooling System The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature 5 3L V8 Engine shown 4 2L L6 and 6 0L V8 Engines similar A
134. ays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 28 for more information including important safety information 3 29 Charging System Light This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to START but the engine is not running as a check to show it is working If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer The light should go out once the engine starts If it stays on or comes on while driving there could be a problem with the charging system A charging system message in the Driver Information Center DIC can also appear See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 45 for more information This light could indicate that there are problems with a generator drive belt or that there is an electrical problem Have it checked right away If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on turn off accessories such as the radio and air conditioner 3 30 Voltmeter Gage Canada United States When your engine is not running but the ignition is on this gage shows the battery s state of charge in DC volts When the engine is running the gage shows the condition of the charging system The gage may transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher reading This is normal Readings between the low and high warning zones ind
135. belts First before you or your passenger s wear a safety belt there is important information you should know if K D AK Gee y an A E WS 2 a KS Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash Q What is wrong with this m ZN CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give as much protection this way Q What is wrong with this A The lap belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose In a crash you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen
136. ber parts That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT We recommend against the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system could be affected The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on If this occurs return to your dealer retailer for service Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel might be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by the vehicle warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving Filling the Tank A CAUTION Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off the engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling the vehicle Do not use cellular phones Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave
137. bes the StabiliTrak system events and the corresponding messages and lights that will be displayed on the instrument panel cluster StabiliTrak Indicator Light DIC Message StabiliTrak On mode System is fully enabled but is not actively controlling vehicle stability Traction Control Off Traction Control Off Mode nape m StabiliTrak system activates using engine speed Blinking Stabili TAK Active management brake traction control and or stability control Service StabiliTrak StabiliTrak system is disabled due to a system fault StabiliTrak Off Mode StabiliTrak indicator light will flash when system first enters this mode StabiliTrak Not Ready StabiliTrak system is disabled due to a failure to initialize Notice If the StabiliTrak light comes on due to heavy braking and or because the traction control system has been continuously active do not allow the wheel s of one axle to spin excessively This could lead to damage to the transfer case and costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty Notice If the wheel s of one axle is allowed to spin excessively while the StabiliTrak ABS and brake warning lights and any relevant DIC messages are displayed the transfer case could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel s excessively while these lights and messages are displayed StabiliTrak may activate on dry or rough roads or under
138. brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied Once the power assist is used up it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Antilock Brake System ABS This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System ABS an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to drive away ABS checks itself A momentary motor or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on This is normal If there is a problem with ABS this warning light stays on See Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light on page 3 32 Along with ABS the vehicle has a Dynamic Rear Proportioning DRP system If there is a DRP problem both the brake and ABS warning lights come on accompanied by a 10 second chime The lights and chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on until the problem is repaired See your dealer retailer for service Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here is what happens with ABS A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels ABS can
139. c volume the audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise while driving by increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases Set the volume at the desired level Press this button to select LOW MEDIUM or HIGH AVOL or depending on the radio MIN MED or MAX AUTO VOL Each higher setting provides more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds The volume level should always sound the same while driving NONE displays if the radio cannot determine the vehicle speed To turn automatic volume off press this button until AVOL OFF automatic volume off displays 3 59 Finding a Station BAND Press to switch between FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 d Tune Turn to select radio stations I4 SEEK Pl Press and release to go to the previous or the next station and stay there The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band To scan stations press and hold either arrow for more than two seconds SCAN displays and one beep sounds The radio goes to a station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station Press either arrow again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning To scan preset stations press and hold either arrow for more than four seconds PSCN displays and the two beeps sound The radio goes to a preset station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next preset station Press either arrow again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning preset
140. ce Saab Customer Assistance Center Saab Automobile USA P O Box 33166 Detroit MI 48232 5166 www Saabusa com 1 800 955 9007 1 800 833 2622 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 852 9001 Canada Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Assistance Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 www gmcanada com 1 800 263 1999 English and French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 Roadside Assistance Program For U S purchased vehicles call 1 800 852 9001 For Canadian purchased vehicles call 1 800 268 6800 Service is available 24 hours a day 365 days a year Calling for Assistance When calling Roadside Assistance have the following information ready Your name home address and home telephone number Telephone number of your location Location of the vehicle Model year color and license plate number of the vehicle Odometer reading Vehicle Identification Number VIN and delivery date of the vehicle Description of the problem Coverage Services are provided up to 4 years 50 000 miles 80 000 km whichever comes first In the U S anyone driving the vehicle is covered In Canada a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Saab and General Motors of Canada Limit
141. ceeded Ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 6 4 31 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo carried in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle If there are a lot of options equipment passengers or cargo in the vehicle it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow If towing a trailer the tongue load must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 for more information about the vehicle s maximum load capacity 4 32 The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight up to a maximum or 400 Ibs 181 kg with a weight carrying hitch The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight up to a maximum of 900 Ibs 408 kg with a weight distributing hitch Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
142. ceive payment up to 100 after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance Mechanical failures may be covered however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service contact your dealer retailer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your Service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer retailer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership retailer let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for Service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair Courtesy Transportation To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper to Bumper Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada in both the U S and Canada Several courtesy transportation options are available to assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty repairs are required Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A sepa
143. cement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield Any damage that occurs would not be covered by your warranty Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield 1 To remove the old wiper blades lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical position 5 56 A Blade Assembly D Blade Pivot B Arm Assembly E Hook Slot C Locking Tab F Arm Hook 2 Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from the wiper arm hook 3 Remove the insert from the blade assembly The insert has two notches at one end that are locked by the bottom claws of the blade assembly At the notched end pull the insert from the blade assembly 4 To install the new wiper insert slide the insert D notched end last into the end with two blade claws A Slide the insert all the way through the blade claws at the opposite end B The plastic caps C will be forced off as the insert is fully inserted Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom claws Make sure that all other claws are properly locked on both sides of the insert slots 9 A Claw in Notch B Correct Installation C Incorrect Installation Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook Pull up until the pivot
144. cess later in this section One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged The DIC message and the TPMS malfunction light should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully See your dealer retailer for service 5 70 Replacement tires or wheels do not match your vehicle s original equipment tires or wheels Tires and wheels other than those recommended for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly See Buying New Tires on page 5 74 Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition See your dealer retailer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on and stays on TPMS Sensor Matching Process Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors or rotate the vehicle s tires the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire wheel position The sensors are matched to the tire wheel positions in the following order driver side front tire passenger side front tire passenger side rear tire and driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool See your dealer retailer for service The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each tire wheel position by increasing or decreasing
145. change the brake pressure to each wheel as required faster than any driver could This can help the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard As the brakes are applied the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even with ABS Using ABS Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let antilock work The brakes might vibrate or some noise might be heard but this is normal Braking in Emergencies ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help more than even the very best braking Brake Assist This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving conditions This feature uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power brake system under conditions where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle The stability system hydraulic brake control module increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle until the ABS a
146. ck to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling do not do anything else until it cools down If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant at the coolant recovery tank but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done The coolant level should be at least up to the FULL COLD mark If it is not there may be a leak in the cooling system How to Add Coolant to the Recovery Tank ZN CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine Notice This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely damaged If coolant is needed add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the FULL COLD mark start the vehicle 5 31 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator lf coolant is needed add the proper mixture directly to ACAUTION An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can the radiator but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools away
147. cle DrivirigzatNIghl aa orale entreen 4 14 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4 15 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 4 16 Highway Hypnosis eee 4 16 Hill and Mountain Roads eseesssss 4 17 Winter Driving iecore RE ne ene ke pr teret 4 18 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow sssessseseseeeeeeeeee 4 20 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out 4 21 Loading the Vehicle sesessse 4 21 TOWING sericea consegndeestecastacigondsnesesatnvnencattaenadany 4 27 Towing Your Vehicle ceeeeeeeeeeee nett eens 4 27 Recreational Vehicle Towing 4 28 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension cU EE 4 28 Towing a Trailer redeo te tet eee 4 29 Your Driving the Road and Defensive Driving the Vehicle Defensive driving means always expect the unexpected The first step in driving defensively is to amp wear your safety belt See Safety Belts They Are for Driving habits can affect fuel mileage Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time When road and weather conditions are appropriate use cruise control if equipped Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require Keep
148. com Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission This may not be long enough for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming Similarly some U S gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulty programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the Programming Universal Home Remote procedures regardless of where you live replace Step 3 under Programming Universal Home Remote with the following Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote button while you press and release every two seconds cycle the hand held transmitter button until the frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the Universal Home Remote The Universal Home Remote indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly Proceed with Step 4 under Programming Universal Home Remote to complete 2 42 Using Universal Home Remote Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote button for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons The programmed buttons should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends To erase all programmed buttons on the Universal Home Remote device 1 Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light b
149. cted but it was pulled back into the DVD player The ignition might not be in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY The parental control button might have been turned on The power indicator light flashes The system might be off The parental control button might have been turned on The power indicator light will flash The system might be in auxiliary mode The disc is upside down or is not compatible Check the display mode settings in the display menu The disc is being stored in the DVD player Press the eject button again to eject the disc Recommended Action In auxiliary mode the Check the auxiliary input picture moves or scrolls connections at both devices Change the Video Format to PAL or NTSC See Stereo RCA Jacks previously for how to change the video format The language in the audio Check the audio or or on the screen is wrong language selection in the main DVD menu The remote control Check to make sure there does not work is no obstruction between the remote control and the transmitter window Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly The parental control button might have been turned on The power indicator light will flash Recommended Action After stopping the player push Play but sometimes the DVD starts where left off and sometimes at the beginning The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or sound My disc
150. ctivates Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased StabiliTrak System The vehicle has the StabiliTrak system which combines antilock brake traction and stability control systems and helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving conditions Traction control activates when the controller senses wheel spin StabiliTrak will selectively apply the brakes and reduce engine torque to help regain traction Stability control activates when the controller senses a discrepancy between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is travelling StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle s brakes to help guide the vehicle in the intended direction When you first start the vehicle and begin to drive away the system performs several diagnostic checks to insure there are no problems The system may be heard or felt while it is working This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle If driving conditions delay system initialization the STABILITRAK NOT READY message may be displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC If this is the case the vehicle does not need servicing For more information on the st
151. ctors such as maintenance temperatures driving speeds vehicle loading and road conditions influence when you need new tires One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators 5 73 You need new tires if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage The rubber in tires degrades over time even if they are not being used This is also true for the spare tire if your vehicle has one Multiple conditions affect how fast this aging takes place including temperatures loading conditions and inflation pressure maintenance With proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out before they degrade due to age If you are unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get older consult the tire manufacturer for more information 5 74 Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle The original equipment tires
152. d fuel system deposits from forming allowing the emission control system to work properly In most cases you should not have to add anything to the fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean or if the vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly one bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS added to the fuel tank at every engine oil change can help clean deposits from fuel injectors and intake valves GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by General Motors Also your dealer retailer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit related problems Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area We recommend that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier However E85 85 ethanol and other fuels containing more than 10 ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels Notice This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rub
153. d reception when the service is needed and technology that is compatible with the OnStar service Not all services are available everywhere particularly in remote or enclosed areas or at all times 2 37 Location information about the vehicle is only available if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available The vehicle must have a working electrical system including adequate battery power for the OnStar equipment to operate There are other problems OnStar cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing OnStar service at any particular time or place Some examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle in a crash hills tall buildings tunnels weather or wireless phone network congestion Your Responsibility Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor cannot be heard If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red the system may not be functioning properly Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic If the light appears clear no light is appearing your OnStar subscription has expired and all services have been deactivated Press the OnStar button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active 2 38 Universal Home Remote System The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to replace up to three hand held Radio Frequency RF transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home lighting This device complies with Part 15 of
154. d some information about them 3 45 CHANGE ENGINE OIL This message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed and service is required for your vehicle See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 and Engine Oil on page 5 18 for more information Also see Engine Oil Life System on page 5 22 for information on how to reset the message This message clears itself after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle CHECK TIRE PRESSURE On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle s tires needs to be checked If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC stop as soon as you can Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label See Tires on page 5 59 Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 The DIC also shows the tire pressure values See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 42 If the tire pressure is low the low tire pressure warning light comes on See Tire Pressure Light on page 3 34 3 46 CHECK WASHER FLUID This message displays if the washer fluid level is low Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir clears this message See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 38 This message clears itself after 10 seconds or you can manually clear it from the DIC display DRIVER DOOR AJAR This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver door is n
155. d the cap before removing it This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir 5 40 ZN CAUTION With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic System the brakes might not work well This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid Notice Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake hydraulic system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in the brake hydraulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 101 Brake Wear This vehicle has disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving except when applying the brake pedal firmly ACAUTION The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well That could lead to an accident When the brake wear warning sound is heard have the vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal whe
156. de in this position Sun Visors with Fixed Rod and Pull out Extension Your vehicle may have this feature Pull the sun visor down to block glare Pull the sun visor extender out for additional coverage Detach the sun visor from the center mount and swing it to the side to cover the side window Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn on the lamps The lamps will turn off when the cover is closed Theft Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities This vehicle has theft deterrent features however they do not make it impossible to steal Content Theft Deterrent Your vehicle is equipped with a content theft deterrent alarm system Here is how to operate the system 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter The security light should flash 3 Close all doors The security light should turn off after approximately 30 seconds The alarm is not armed until the security light turns off If a locked door is opened without the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter the alarm will go off The headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes and the horn will sound for 30 seconds then will turn off to save the battery power Remember the theft deterrent system will not activate if you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door lock It activates only if you u
157. ded pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture 5 66 High Speed Operation A CAUTION Driving at high speeds 100 mph 160 km h or higher puts an additional strain on tires Sustained high speed driving causes excessive heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure You could have a crash and you or others could be killed Some high speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high speed operation When speed limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle can be driven at high speeds make sure the tires are rated for high speed operation in excellent condition and set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load If your vehicle has P255 55R18 size tires installed on the rear axle they will require inflation pressure adjustment when driving your vehicle at speeds above 99 mph 160 km h Set the cold inflation pressure for the rear tires only to the maximum inflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall or 36 psi 248 kPa whichever is lower See the example following When you end this high speed driving r
158. dio System sssssss 3 74 Highbeam On Light seeeeeees 3 39 Bluetooth T intet etr ropes era E 3 74 Service All Wheel Drive Light 3 40 Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System 3 84 Check Gages Warning Light ssssss 3 40 Rear Seat Audio RSA ccecce 3 95 Gate Ajar Light seen 3 40 Theft Deterrent Feature ueeeseessse 3 97 Fuel Gage sssesessm mH 3 41 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 3 97 Low Fuel Warning Light sese 3 41 Radio Reception ceci 3 98 Check Gas Cap Light sseseesess 3 41 Fixed Mast Antenna 222 uens rese se bube net 3 99 Driver Information Center DIC 3 42 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 99 DIC Operation and Displays sss 3 42 DIC Warnings and Messages sssse 3 45 DIC Vehicle Customization sssssss 3 51 NOTES 3 3 Instrument Panel Overview 3 4 The main components of the instrument panel are the following nmnmo0o0wr gt Outlet Adjustment on page 3 23 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 6 Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 97 Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3 25 Windshield Wipers on page 3 8 Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 or Driver Information Center DIC
159. dio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets if equipped Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed This will avoid sparks and help to save both batteries And it could save the radio 4 Open both hoods and locate the batteries Find the positive and negative terminals on each battery Your vehicle has a remote negative jump starting terminal You should always use this remote terminal instead of the terminal on the battery The remote negative terminal is located on the front engine lift bracket on vehicles with the 4 2L L6 engine or the engine accessory drive bracket for vehicles with the 5 3L or 6 0L V8 engines and is marked GND Ground See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location 5 44 A CAUTION Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you do not explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Do not get it o
160. ds to dial phone numbers and name tags Noise Keep interior noise levels to a minimum The system may not recognize voice commands if there is too much background noise When to Speak A short tone sounds after the system responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice command Wait until the tone and then speak How to Speak Speak clearly in a calm and natural voice 3 74 Audio System When using the in vehicle Bluetooth system sound comes through the vehicle s front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system Use the audio system volume knob during a call to change the volume level The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later calls To prevent missed calls a minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned down too low Bluetooth Controls Use the button located on the steering wheel to operate the in vehicle Bluetooth system See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 97 for more information O9 Push To Talk Press to answer incoming calls to confirm system information and to start speech recognition Pairing A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the in vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used See the cell phone manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the cell phone If a Bluetooth phone is not connected calls will be made using OnStar Hands Free Calling if available Refer to the OnStar owne
161. dy area that is unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints The harness system holds the infant in place and ina crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint A forward facing child seat B provides restraint for the child s body with the harness 1 35 Securing an Add On Child Restraint in the Vehicle A CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle s safety belt or LATCH system following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual A booster seat C D is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window 1 36 To help reduce the chance of injury the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt or by the LATCH system See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 39 for more information A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle When securing
162. e Scheduling Appointments 7 8 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 64 Setting the Clock ssssssesseseseeee 3 57 Sheet Metal Damage sss 5 104 Shifting into Park iieri tenerte 2 28 11 Shifting Out of Park 2 0 0 dense iieii isik 2 29 Signals Turn and Lane Change 3 7 Spare Tite eesriie iaces STEE EEEE 5 97 Installing ioni eri erp Roe dann 5 86 REMOVING T 5 83 SION E 5 94 Specifications Capacities sss 5 113 Speedometer as 4 occ inrer be eret dua 3 26 StabiliTrak Service Light esesessssss 3 32 StabiliTrak Indicator Light 3 33 StabiliTrak System sssri ironias irn EEEE 4 6 Starting the Engine W sssevererereeee kernerne 2 21 S E 4 10 Steering Wheel Controls Audio 3 97 Steering Wheel Tilt Wheel ssussusses 3 6 Storage Areas Center Console Storage Area 2 44 Gupholders 2 5 enean oa dne 2 43 GIOVE IBOX iL concise tance ge rino i canines Een LEE Minis 2 43 Luggage Carrier sseseeeeeseseeee 2 44 Overhead Console sseeeseeses 2 44 Rear Floor Storage Cover ssssss 2 45 Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 4 20 SUVs GOES enese TEE 2 15 12 BEI er aa dean pads 3 26 Taillam
163. e belt across you Do not let it get twisted The lap shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger belt out all the way the child restraint locking feature may be engaged If this happens let the belt go back all the way and start again Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the right front seating position may affect the passenger sensing system See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 59 for more information Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 1 28 Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 1 23 4 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants 1 24 To unlatch the belt push the button on the buckle The belt should return to its stowed position Before a door is closed be sure the safety belt is out of the way If a door is slammed against a safety belt damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle Safety Belt Pretensioners This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for
164. e cell phone manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone supports this feature This feature can be used to verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Voice The system responds with OK accessing phone name gt The cell phone s normal prompt messages will go through its cycle according to the phone s operating instructions Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Tones The in vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and numbers stored as name tags during a call This is used when calling a menu driven phone system Account numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls Sending a Number During a Call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Dial The system responds with Say a number to send tones followed by a tone 3 Say the number to send f the system clearly recognizes the number it responds with OK Sending Number and the dial tones are sent and the call continues f the system is not sure it recognized the number properly it responds Dial Number Please say yes or no followed by a tone If the number is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Sending Number and the dial tones are sent and the call continues
165. e compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs 1 34 ZN CAUTION To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during a crash infants need complete support This is because an infant s neck is not fully developed and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing child restraint settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants should always be secured in rear facing child restraints Child Restraint Systems A rear facing infant seat A provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant ACAUTION A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a bo
166. e current track or chapter Press again to return to the previous track or chapter This button might not work while the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 1 through 0 Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad provides the capability of direct chapter title and track number selection Z 10 Double Digit Entries Press to select chapter title and track numbers greater than 9 Press before inputting the number amp Clear Press within three seconds to clear a number that has been entered 3 Illumination Press to turn the remote control backlight on The backlight times out after about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on Main DVD Menu Press to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This button only operates when playing a DVD Enter Press to select the choices that are highlighted in any menu amp Return Press to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button operates only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active en Camera Angle Press to change camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function will vary for each disc Subtitle Press to turn on subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing The
167. e displays and or the CD ejects it could be for one of the following reasons Itis very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play The road is very rough When the road becomes smoother the CD should play The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again The format of the CD may not be compatible See Using an MP3 on page 3 68 later in this section There could have been a problem while burning the CD The label could be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatealy or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem 3 67 Using an MP3 MP3 CD R Disc MP3 Format If you burn an MP3 disc on a personal computer Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD R disc Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc Make sure playlists have a mp3 or wpl extension other file extensions might not work Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or variable bit rates Song title artist name and album can display when files are recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2 Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Organize songs by albums using one folder for each
168. e fuel remaining in the fuel tank The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is an average of recent driving conditions As your driving conditions change this data is gradually updated Fuel range cannot be reset Fuel Used Press the fuel information button until FUEL USED appears on the display This mode shows the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item To reset the fuel used information press and hold the select button for one second while FUEL USED is displayed Average Fuel Economy Press the fuel information button until AVG ECON appears on the display This mode shows how many miles per gallon MPG kilometers per liter km L or liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km your vehicle is getting based on current and past driving conditions Press and hold the select button for one second while AVG ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel economy Average fuel economy will then be calculated starting from that point If the average fuel economy is not reset it will be continually updated each time you drive Engine Oil Life System Press the fuel information button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life It will show 100 when the system is reset after an oil change It will alert you to change your oil on a schedule consistent with yo
169. e is repaired Once the tire is repaired replace the hubcap 5 95 7 Make sure the tire is stored securely Push pull A and then try to turn B the tire If the tire moves use the wheel wrench and socket end of the extension to tighten the cable 8 Return the equipment to the proper location in the vehicle as shown next 5 96 A Handle E Knob B Wheel Wrench F Wheel Blocks C Instruction Label and Jack D Extension s 1 Attach the handle A wheel wrench B and extension D in the slots provided 2 Roll up the instruction label C and return to the slot in the tool kit 3 Assemble the wheel blocks F to the jack 4 Turn the knob E on the jack clockwise to raise the jack head 5 Return the rear seat to its proper position Spare Tire Your vehicle when new had a fully inflated spare tire A spare tire may lose air over time so check its inflation pressure regularly See nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle For instruction on how to remove install or store a spare tire see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5 86 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 94 After installing the spare tire on your vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is correctly inflated The spare tire is made to perform well at speeds up t
170. e not covered by the warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only Climate Controls F Recirculation Air Delivery G Air Conditioning Mode Control a P H Defrost J Rear Window Defogger Dual Automatic Climate Control System Outside Air Temperature Display With this system the heating cooling and ventilation can A new outside temperature reading is displayed if the be controlled on the vehicle When the vehicle is first vehicle has been off for more than three hours started and the climate control system is on or if If the vehicle has been off for less than three hours the climate control system has been turned on the the old temperature reading may be displayed because display shows the driver s temperature setting for underhood heat is affecting the true outside temperature five seconds Then it shows the outside temperature Underhood heat can also affect the outside temperature while the engine is running It may also take several minutes of driving before the display updates to the actual outside temperature A Driver and Passenger C Display Side Temperature D AUTO Controls E Power Button B Fan Control 3 19 Automatic Operation AUTO Automatic When automatic operation is active the system controls the air delivery mode fan speed and temperature inside the vehicle Use the steps below to place the entire sy
171. e number Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in the window on the mirror by pressing the D button Once you find your zone number release the button After about four seconds the mirror returns to the compass display and the new zone number is set If CAL appears in the compass window the compass may need calibration See Compass Calibration listed previously 2 33 Outside Power Mirrors The outside power mirror control is located on the driver s door 1 Turn the knob toward the mirror you desire to adjust 2 Move the control in the direction you want the mirror to go 3 Adjust the mirror in all four directions to see the side of your vehicle and the area behind your vehicle 4 After adjusting each mirror turn the control to the center position so the mirror cannot be moved If you reach the mirror s end of the travel position in any direction the mirror enters a ratcheting mode This action is harmless Itis a warning that the mirror can go no further To stop this action back the mirror up by moving the control in the opposite direction 2 34 Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash To fold push the mirror toward the vehicle Push the mirror outward to return to its original position Outside Convex Mirror ZN CAUTION A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too s
172. e of the following to return to normal operation Shut off all lamps and close all doors Turn the ignition key to ON RUN This feature also turns off the parking lamps and headlamps under most circumstances if they are left on Turn the exterior lamps knob to turn them back on Accessory Power Outlet s Accessory power outlets let you plug in auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone The vehicle has three accessory power outlets There are two outlets located below the climate controls and one outlet is on the rear of the center floor console Remove the cover from the outlet to use the outlet Be sure to put the cover back on when not using the accessory power outlet Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adaptor fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer retailer for additional information on the accessory power outlets Notice Adding any electrical equipment to the vehicle can damage it or keep other components from working as they should The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Check with your dealer retailer before adding electrical equipment When adding electrical equipment be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment Notice Improper use of the power outlet can cause damag
173. e serviced right away If there is a problem with the airbag system an airbag Driver Information Center DIC message can also come on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 45 for more information Passenger Airbag Status Indicator The vehicle has the passenger sensing system See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 59 for important safety information The rearview mirror has a passenger airbag status indicator ez ON PASSENGER AIR BAG United States Ro RY Canada When the vehicle is started the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off for several seconds as a system check Then after several more seconds the status indicator will light either ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag If after several seconds both status indicator lights remain on or if there are no lights at all there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system See your dealer retailer for service A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and st
174. e slats as far forward as possible and against the side rails making sure to fasten it securely Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading the vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 To prevent damage or loss of cargo while driving check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier is locked and cargo is still securely fastened When the luggage carrier is not in use place the crossrails at the following positions for reduced wind noise Place one crossrail at the rear most point of the vehicle and the other crossrail above the opening of the rear door Rear Floor Storage Cover ZN CAUTION If any removable convenience item is not secured properly it can move around in a collision or sudden stop People in the vehicle could be injured Be sure to secure any such item properly The vehicle has a rear cargo area with a removable storage cover To remove the rear floor storage cover do the following 1 Press the latch release and lift up the latch handle 2 Raise the cover slightly to unhook it 3 Pull the cover towards the rear of the vehicle to release it from the forward mounting slots To reinstall the rear floor storage cover reverse the previous steps Make sure the cover is secure by applying slight pressure to the latch until it clicks 2 45 Cargo Cover The cargo cover can be used to cover items in the cargo area of the vehic
175. e supported by the DVD player The DVD player does not support DVD RAM DVD ROM and DVD Audio media An error message will appear on the display if this type of media is inserted into the DVD player When using the wired headphones not included if the front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six Disc CD or use XM Satellite Radio Service the audio for these sources is heard instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playing through the RSE If an error message appears on the video screen see DVD Messages later in this section 3 87 DVD Player Buttons Without Sunroof Panasonic D Power Press to turn the RSE system on and off The power indicator light illuminates when the power is on a Eject Press to eject a DVD or CD SRCE Source Press to switch between the DVD player and an auxiliary source E Stop Press to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD or CD Press twice to return to the beginning of the DVD 3 88 gt Play Pause Press to start play of a DVD or CD Press while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it Press again to continue the play of the DVD or CD Main DVD Menu Press to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This button only operates when playing a DVD C Set up Menu Press to adjust the color tint bright
176. e the video screen push forward on the release latch and the screen will fold down Adjust the screen s position as desired When the video screen is not in use push it up into its latched position The DVD player and display will continue to operate when the screen is in the up or the down position The video screen contains the transmitters for the wireless headphones and the remote control If the screen is in the closed position the signals will not be available for the operation of the headphones or the remote control Notice Avoid directly touching the video screen as damage may occur See Cleaning the Video Screen later in this section for more information DVD Player The DVD player is located in the overhead console The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the DVD player and or by the buttons on the remote control See Remote Control later in this section for more information The DVD player power may be turned on when the ignition is in ON RUN ACC ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country that the vehicle was sold in The DVD region code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs Standard audio CDs CD R CD RW Video CD and Photo CD CD R media are fully supported by this DVD player DVD R and DVD RW media is supported if formatted as DVD Video DVD R and DVD RW media may or may not b
177. e up The player pulls the CD in To insert multiple CDs 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds A beep sounds and the indicator light located to the right of the slot flashes and LOAD displays 3 63 3 Once the light stops flashing and turns green INSERT CD displays load a CD Insert the CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls the CD in Once the CD is loaded the indicator light flashes again After the light stops flashing and turns green load another CD The CD player takes up to six CDs Do not try to load more than six To load more than one CD but less than six complete Steps 1 through 3 When finished loading CDs press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function The radio begins to play the last CD loaded If more than one CD has been loaded a number for each CD displays Playing a Specific Loaded CD For every CD loaded a number appears on the display To play a specific CD first press the CD button then press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds to the CD A small bar appears under the CD number that is playing and the track number appears on the display If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section 3 64 A Eject Press to eject CD s To eject the CD that is currently playing press and release this button To eject multiple CDs 1 Press and hold the CD eject button for five seconds A beep
178. e vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because the surface could be damaged Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Notice Driving the vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes could damage the aluminum or chrome plated wheels The repairs would not be covered by the warranty Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes 5 103 Tires To clean the tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner Notice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materia
179. eadlamps will be on If the vehicle has the High Intensity Discharge HID lighting system option the DRL system will turn on the turn signal lamps If the vehicle does not have HID the DRL system will turn on the headlamps at reduced brightness The taillamps sidemarker and the instrument panel lights will not be on When it begins to get dark the headlamps will automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside the Automatic Headlamp System turns on the headlamps when the vehicle is started and after the transmission has been shifted out of the P Park position The headlamps taillamps sidemarker and parking lamps will come on The instrument panel lights and radio lights will also turn on at normal brightness Once on the system remains on during these conditions even if the vehicle is shifted back into P Park The vehicle has a light sensor on the top of the instrument panel Do not cover the sensor or the system may come on whenever the ignition is on and the vehicle is shifted out of the P Park position The system could also turn on the lamps when driving through a parking garage heavy overcast weather or a tunnel This is normal There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not a
180. ease RPT ON displays Press again to turn off repeat play RPT OFF displays For the Radio with Six Disc CD player repeat the CD you are listening to by pressing and holding Ge for two seconds RPT ON displays Press again to turn off repeat play RPT OFF displays 4 x Random Press to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order RDM ON displays Press this pushbutton again to turn off random play RDM OFF displays Random Radio with Six Disc CD Player The CD tracks can be listened to in random rather than sequential order on one CD or on all of the CDs To use random To play the tracks on the CD in random order press and release the random button RANDOM ONE displays Press this button again to turn off random play 3 66 To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded in random order press and hold this button for more than two seconds A beep sounds and RANDOM ALL displays Press this button again to turn off random play 4 SEEK Pl Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current or the previous track Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track If a track is approximately 10 seconds into its song press either the left or right arrow twice to get to the previous or next track To scan tracks press either arrow for more than two seconds until one beep sounds and SCAN displays The CD searches the previous or next tracks at two seconds per track
181. eat passengers to select and listen to any of the available radio sources AM FM XM CD or DVD However a rear seat passenger cannot control a source selected on the radio by someone in the front of the vehicle For example the RSA cannot be used to change CD tracks if the radio is set to CD Also if the radio is switched to a source the RSA has control of sound will not be lost but the RSA will lose control of that source Rear seat passengers always have control of the volume for each set of headphones The RSA will run when the radio is off if the ignition key is positioned in the power mode 3 95 O Power Press to turn the RSA on or off The rear speakers are muted when the power is turned on 4 Volume The left hand knob controls the headphone outlet on the left and the right hand knob controls the headphone outlet on the right Turn either knob clockwise to increase the volume and counterclockwise to decrease the volume SRCE Source Press to select an audio source AM FM XM CD or DVD The inactive CD or DVD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening 3 96 There are sources that are internal to the radio such as AM FM and CD and other sources to radio that are external such as XM DVD and OnStar If an external source has been selected the rear seat passengers cannot select a different external source SEEK Press to go to the next station or CD track and stay there The display
182. eating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire 5 63 Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road 5 64 Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread remains See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 73 UTQGS Uni
183. eceived including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 3 84 Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system The RSE system includes a DVD player a video display screen two sets of wireless headphones and a remote control Before You Drive The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only not intended for the driver while driving Parental Control This button is located behind the video screen Press this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze the video and mute the audio The video screen will display Parental Control ON and the power indicator light on the DVD player will flash It will also disable all other button operations from the remote control and the DVD player with the exception of the eject button Press this button again to restore operation of the DVD player This button can also be used to turn the DVD player power on and automatically resume play if the ignition is in ON RUN ACC ACCESSORY or if Retained Accessory Power
184. ed on the driver s door When adjustments are made the new settings are automatically saved for the driver 3 24 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to the warning lights and gages could prevent injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle s functions Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to indicate a problem with the vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that explains what to do Follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You will know how fast you are going about how much fuel you have used and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and economically United States version shown Canada similar 3 25 Speedometer and Odometer The speedometer the vehicle speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h The odometer sh
185. ed reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification Saab and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too often or the same type of claim is made many times Services Provided Emergency Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station Lock Out Service Service is provided to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out A remote unlock may be available if you have OnStar For security reasons the driver must present identification before this service is given Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway Tow to the nearest Saab dealer for warranty service or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven Assistance is also given when the vehicle is stuck in sand mud or snow Flat Tire Change Service is provided to change a flat tire with the spare tire The spare tire if equipped must be in good condition and properly inflated It is the owner s responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty Battery Jump Start Service is provided to jump start a dead battery Trip Routing Service Detailed maps of North America are provided when requested either with the most direct route or the most scenic route Additional travel information is also available Allow three wee
186. eenee 2 21 Seat tt HM HET 1 2 Steering Fl ld 1 iere tenes 5 37 WindoWS resoan E a E aY 2 14 PEN BEY rera e e ates dre ne ekte Eee 7 15 Event Data Recorders seeeseeeesse 7 16 Navigation System ssssse 7 17 uii 7 17 Radio Frequency Identification 7 17 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 9 Radiator Pressure Cap ceceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneees 5 34 Radio Frequency Identification RFID Privacy 7 17 FladiO S itasse eti nte emn er cata bcnc UPS Rd LE TUER 3 58 Radios Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manuale esiaren E a ERE 3 74 Rear Seat Audio cccceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeee es 3 95 gizjelelonptret ce 3 98 Setting the Clock eseeeeeeseeesee 3 57 Theft Deterrent ssesesssssssesessee 3 97 Reading Lamps 3i eee ran eee 3 17 10 Fear AIO baroner O DP ADEL 5 48 Limited Slip esee 4 10 Rear Climate Control System 3 23 Rear Door Security Locks uses 2 11 Rear Floor Storage Cover ssssessss 2 45 Rear Seat Audio RSA a se 3 95 Rear Seat Entertainment System 3 84 Rear Seat Operation sess 1 8 Rear Windshield Washer Wiper 3 9 Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming 2 32 Reclining Seatbacks Power suseusssse 1 5
187. eessess 3 10 Trip Od t 3 26 Cruise Gontrol isesiciins ninni mienas aaia nai 3 10 MP S GURSUSE dutettedests itas eisien iraya iias Headlamps cececseseseseeseseesesesteseseesereseereees 3 13 Tachometer D 3 26 Headlamps on Reminder 3 14 Safety Belt Reminders sese 3 27 Daytime Running Lamps RD 3 14 Afbag Readiness Light csse 3 28 Automatic Headlamp System sss 3 14 racing syden Light MANOR setantaus S30 FOG Camps erenn e aea a EE SNS pend E E ee pee Instrument Panel Brightness 3 16 Busco PB ME MEE He a T 16 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light 3 32 Entry Lighting o 3 16 StabiliTrak Service Light 00 ee 3 32 Exit Lighting icone tente eter deret 3 17 StabiliTrak Indicator Light 3 33 Reading Lamps s47 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage seerne 3 39 3 1 Section 3 Instrument Panel Tire Pressure Light ocior ente eness 3 34 Audio System s sssssseseee 3 57 Malfunction Indicator Lamp sss 3 34 Setting the Clock c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 57 Oil Pressure Gage eese 3 37 RaGlo S EET 3 58 Secutity Light oio ei retenir etna 3 38 Using m MPS 5 33 raden pel as riprende 3 68 Cruise Control Light esee 3 38 XM Radio Messages eee 3 72 Reduced Engine Power Light 3 39 Navigation Ra
188. egins to flash after 20 seconds 2 Release both buttons Reprogramming a Single Universal Home Remote Button To reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remote buttons repeat the programming instructions earlier in this section beginning with Step 2 For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System call the customer assistance phone number under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 6 Storage Areas Glove Box Lift the glove box handle up to open it Use the key to lock and unlock the glove box Cupholders A cupholder is located on the instrument panel next to the radio To open the cupholder push once on the support and the cupholder will move into position for use To close the cupholder lift the support up towards the instrument panel A cupholder is located on the front of the center console and two more are located at the rear of the center console To use the rear cupholders pull down on the lid 2 43 Overhead Console For this vehicles with this feature the overhead console may include reading lamps a Universal Home Remote and a moonroof switch See the following for more information Reading Lamps on page 3 17 Universal Home Remote System on page 2 38 Moonroof on page 2 47 Center Console Storage Grasp the front lever on the center console while lifting the top to open it The console may contain one or more of the following components Rear Seat Audio Controls
189. ehicle Adding outside equipment to the front of the vehicle such as hood air deflectors may affect the performance of the heating and air conditioning system Check with your dealer retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle Rear Climate Control System Use the lower buttons on the rear seat audio to adjust the rear seat climate controls The temperature of the air coming through the rear outlets is determined by the front passenger s temperature setting A Fan Control B Power Button C Air Delivery Mode Control VE Fan Press to increase or decrease the fan speed V AN Mode Press to change the direction of airflow in the rear seat area to either vent bi level or floor mode 3 23 o On Off Press to turn the rear climate controls on or off The rear control only turns on if the front control is on and not in defrost mode Climate Controls Personalization The vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC Climate control settings can be stored and recalled for temperature air delivery mode and fan speed for two different drivers The personal choice settings recalled are determined by the transmitter used to enter the vehicle After the button with the unlock symbol on a remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed the climate control will adjust to the last settings of the identified driver The settings can also be changed by pressing one of the memory buttons 1 or 2 locat
190. ehicles excluding vehicles equipped with the 6 0L V8 engine the proper level is from 0 to 0 40 inch 0 to 10 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the rear axle For vehicles equipped with the 6 0L V8 engine the proper level is from 0 6 inch to 1 6 inches 15 mm to 40 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the rear axle differential cover Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level What to Use To determine what kind of lubricant to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Front Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the front axle you may need to add some lubricant When the differential is cold add enough lubricant to raise the level to 0 50 inch 12 mm below the filler plug hole When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use To determine what kind of lubricant to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Headlamp Aiming Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and should need no f
191. elts They Are for Everyone This section of the manual describes how to use safety belts properly It also describes some things not to do with safety belts A CAUTION Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly In a crash if you or your passenger s are not wearing safety belts the injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the vehicle You and your passenger s can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passenger s are restrained properly too A CAUTION It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the safety belts See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3 27 for additional information In most states and in all Canadian provinces the law requires wearing safety belts Here is why You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a crash you do not know if it will be a serious one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person
192. ending on the space available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions it can be turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery The vehicle s right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches 8 to 13 cm about one eighth turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing Passing another vehicle on a two lane road can be dangerous To reduce the risk of danger while passing Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect a successful pass If in doubt wait Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection Never cross a solid or double solid line on yo
193. equired and the clutch disengages You may also hear this fan noise when the engine is started The sound will go away as the fan clutch disengages Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for reservoir location Li When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid do the following 1 Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down 2 Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean 3 Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag 4 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 5 Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick For vehicles with the 4 2L L6 engine the level should be at the C Cold mark For vehicles with the 5 3L or 6 0L V8 engines the level should be at the FULL mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals 5 37 Windshield Washer Fluid Notice When using concentrated washer fluid follow What to Use t
194. er DIC steering wheel control buttons See Tire Pressures under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 42 When a low tire pressure condition is detected the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressure warning e light located on the instrument panel cluster At the same time a message to check the pressure ina specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center DIC display The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 42 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 45 The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you start to drive This could be an early indicator that the air pressure in the tire s are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure A Tire and Loading Information label attached to your vehicle shows the size of your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle s tires when they are cold See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 For the location of the Tire and Loading Information label see Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 Also see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 Your vehicle s TPMS can alert you about a low tire pressure condit
195. er follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 39 for more information 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Rear Seat Position Many child restraints are too wide to be correctly secured in the center rear seat although some of them will fit there If the center seat position is too narrow for your child restraint secure it in a rear outside seat position If you secure a child restraint in the center seat position follow the instructions in Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1 46 1 48 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position This vehicle has airbags A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 38 In addition the vehicle has a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 59 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 29 for more information including important safety information A label on the sun visor says
196. er understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Important EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location is recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Saab will not access this data or share it with others except with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee in response to an official request of police or similar government office as part of Saab s defense of litigation through the discovery process or as required by law Data that Saab collects or receives may also be used for Saab research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner OnStar If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar services please refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions
197. ering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels Turn off any traction or stability system Shift back and forth between R Reverse and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible To prevent transmission wear wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears Release the accelerator pedal while shifting and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries it might need to be towed out If the vehicle does need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 27 Loading the Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed to carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification Tire label ZN CAUTION Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on the vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle Tire and L
198. erior lamp control is in AUTO Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield gently loosen or thaw them If they become damaged install new blades or blade inserts For more information see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5 56 Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down Windshield Washer S Windshield Washer Press the windshield washer paddle to spray washer fluid on the windshield The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to the preset speed ZN CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision Rear Window Wiper Washer A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision The rear window wiper washer control is located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel To turn the rear wiper on turn the control to either 1 2 or 3 For delayed wiping turn the control to 1 or 2 For steady wiping turn the control to 3 To turn the wiper off turn the control to 0 To wash the rear window press aJ located in the center of the control The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as the windshield
199. erson remain in this position for two to three minutes after the on indicator is lit If a person of adult size is sitting in the right front passenger seat but the off indicator is lit it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat 1 63 Additional Factors Affecting System Operation Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status See Safety Belts and Child Restraints in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket or cushion or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers seat heaters and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 65 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates A CAUTION Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system 1 64 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the airbag system in several places arou
200. ervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety dependability and emission control performance Your dealer retailer can assist with these checks and services Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 At Each Fuel Fill It is important to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Notice It is important to check the engine oil regularly and keep it at the proper level Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle warranty Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil on page 5 18 Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant on page 5 30 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Inspect the vehicle s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures Do not forget to check the spare tire See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 82 Tire Wear Inspection Tire rotation may be required f
201. es directly beneath them the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files The empty folder is not displayed No Folder When the CD contains only compressed files the files are located under the root folder The next and previous folder functions do not function on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists When displaying the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT When the CD contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists Px first and then go to the root folder When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT Order of Play Tracks play in the following order Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist e Ifthe CD does not contain any playlists then play begins from the first track under the root directory When all tracks from the root directory have played play continues from files according to their numerical listing After playing the last track from the last folder play begins again at the first track of the first folder or root directory When play enters a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder na
202. ess while HEADLAMP DELAY 10 SEC is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt will scroll through the following settings HEADLAMP DELAY 10 SEC Seconds default The headlamps will stay on for 10 seconds HEADLAMP DELAY 20 SEC The headlamps will stay on for 20 seconds HEADLAMP DELAY 40 SEC The headlamps will stay on for 40 seconds HEADLAMP DELAY 1 MIN Minute The headlamps will stay on for 1 minute HEADLAMP DELAY 2 MIN The headlamps will stay on for 2 minutes HEADLAMP DELAY 3 MIN The headlamps will stay on for 3 minutes HEADLAMP DELAY OFF The headlamps will not turn on To select a setting and move on to the next feature press Ef while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 53 Perimeter Lights Press until PERIMETER LIGHTS ON appears in the display To select your preference for perimeter lighting press lt while PERIMETER LIGHTS ON is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt will scroll through the following settings PERIMETER LIGHTS ON default The headlamps and back up lamps will come on for 40 seconds if it is dark enough outside when you unlock the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter PERIMETER LIGHTS OFF The perimeter lights will not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter To select a setting and move on to the next feature press X while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 54 Easy Exit Seat Pr
203. ess Ef until EASY EXIT SEAT OFF appears in the display To select your preference for seat position exit press lt while EASY EXIT SEAT OFF is displayed on the DIC Pressing t will scroll through the following settings EASY EXIT SEAT OFF default No seat exit recall will occur EASY EXIT SEAT ON The driver s seat will move to the exit position when the key is removed from the ignition To select a setting and move on to the next feature press EK while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC See Easy Exit Seat under Memory Seat on page 1 3 for more information Seat Recall Press until SEAT RECALL OFF appears in the display To select your preference for recall of the driver s memory seat and adjustable pedals if your vehicle has this feature press lt while SEAT RECALL OFF is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt 4 will scroll through the following settings SEAT RECALL OFF default The driver s memory seat and adjustable pedals position you saved will only be recalled when the memory button 1 or 2 is pressed SEAT RECALL AT KEY IN The driver s memory seat and adjustable pedals position you saved will be recalled when you put the key in the ignition SEAT RECALL ON REMOTE The driver s memory seat and adjustable pedals position you saved will be recalled when you unlock the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Whichever position 1 or 2 you programmed with the trans
204. ess the left arrow to go to the start of the previous track Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track Press either arrow for more than two seconds and SCAN displays The radio scans the previous or next tracks at two tracks per second Release the arrow to stop scanning and to play the track DISP Display Press to switch between track mode folder playlist mode and time of day mode The display shows only eight characters but there can be up to four pages of text If there are more than eight characters in the song folder or playlist name pressing DISP within two seconds takes the CD to the next page of text If there are no other pages to be shown pressing DISP within two seconds takes the CD to the next display mode Track mode displays the current track number and the ID3 tag song name Folder playlist mode displays the current folder or playlist number and the folder playlist name Time of day mode displays the time of day and the ID3 tag song name To change the default on the display press the DISP knob until the desired option displays then hold this knob for two seconds One beep sounds and the selected display becomes the default 3 71 i Information INFO displays whenever a current track has ID3 tag information Press 1 to display the artist name and album contained in the tag INFO disappears from the display when the information in the ID3 tag has finished BAND
205. essing the trip stem If you press and hold the trip stem or the select button for more than four seconds the display will show the distance traveled since the last ignition cycle for TRIP A or TRIP B Tire Pressures On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS press the trip information button until TIRE PRESSURES appears on the display This mode shows the tire pressure in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa Press the select button to scroll through the following information LF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the front driver s side tire RF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the front passenger s side tire LR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rear driver s side tire RR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rear passenger ss side tire Timer The DIC can be used as a timer Press the select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset not including time the ignition is off Time will continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on even if another display is being shown on the DIC The timer will record up to 99 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds 99 59 59 after which the display will roll back to zero To stop the counting of time press the select button briefly while TIMER is displayed To reset the timer to zero press and hold the select button while TIMER is displayed Cu
206. eturn the tires to the cold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 Example You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure molded on the tire s sidewall in small letters near the rim flange It will read something like this Maximum load 690 kg 1521 Ibs 300 kPa 44 psi Max Press For this example you would set the inflation pressure for high speed driving at 36 psi 248 kPa The inflation pressure for the front tires should be set to the cold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label lf your vehicle has P255 50R20 size tires installed on the rear axle they will require inflation pressure adjustment when driving your vehicle at speeds above 99 mph 160 km h Set the cold inflation pressure for the rear tires only to the maximum inflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall or 38 psi 262 kPa whichever is lower See the example following When you end this high speed driving return the tires to the cold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 Example You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure molded on the tire s sidewall in small letters near the rim flange It will read something like this Maximum load 690 kg 1521 Ibs 300 kPa 44 psi Max Press For this example you would set the inflation pressure for high speed dri
207. ey L J from the ignition will move the seat to the exit position See Easy Exit Seat under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 51 for more information on activating this feature in the DIC To recline the seatback press the control toward If an easy exit seat position has not been stored the rear of the vehicle the default position is all the way rearward To raise the seatback press the control toward the front of the vehicle A CAUTION Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this The shoulder belt cannot do its job In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt cannot do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving 1 6 Head Restraints Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant s head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash Pull the head restraint up to raise it ST To lower the head restraint press the button
208. ffect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system are only affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay lf the vehicle is started in a dark garage the automatic headlamp system comes on after the transmission is shifted out of P Park Once the vehicle leaves the garage it takes about one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside During that delay the instrument panel cluster might not be as bright as usual Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position If the vehicle is running and the automatic headlamp system is already on it can be turned off by turning and releasing the headlamp control at the off position The automatic headlamp system stays off until you turn and release the headlamp control at the off position again See Headlamps on page 3 13 Fog Lamps The fog lamp control is located on the turn signal multifunction lever Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions 40 The band with this symbol is used to turn the fog lamps on and off When the fog lamps are turned on the parking lamps also turn on A message will also display on the DIC when the fog lamps are turned on or off See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 42 To turn the fog lamps on or off turn the fog lamp band on the lever up to the dot and release it The band will return to its original posi
209. fications 22 ure eren ree ette LOE RRS 5 5 Gate vAjat Bot 3 40 Els d 2 43 Hazard Warning Flashers seeseseseeese 3 6 Head Restraints eite thee 1 7 Headlamp AIO inno ett acte o reps cxt bap spe huie Mode 5 50 Headlamps 415 htt t et ran rm nni 3 13 5 51 Bulb Replacement sse 5 50 Daytime Running Lamp eee 3 14 Electrical System acercan 5 106 Flash to Pass s oeste eer Aiea 3 8 Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking Lamps erret 5 53 Halogen Bulbs 4 3 roit ridet 5 51 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 5 50 High Low Beam Changer esssssssse 3 7 On Reminder 52 3 rare nini unari 3 14 EC Idm 3 10 Heated Seats ssssssseeeneeeee 1 3 Heater Engine Coolant ee ienasi eases 2 23 Heater gt DEEST 3 19 Highbeam On Light sese 3 39 High Speed Operation Tires 5 66 Highway Hypnosis eee 4 16 Hill and Mountain Roads sseeeeeeees 4 17 Hood Checking Things Under esee 5 10 Release etie seien ed eds 5 11 ule deer eod E EUER 3 6 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 15 Ighition POSITIONS siii anas 2 20 Infants and Young Children Restraints 1 31 Inflation Tire Pressure seen 5 65 Instrument Panel Briglitiess 2c etal Bie e an ing 3 16 Cluster m 3 25
210. fore folding the seat 1 Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors secure the child 1 44 restraint with the top tether and the safety belts Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual 1 1 Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position 1 2 Pull the strap at the center of the seat where the seat cushion meets the seatback This will allow you to fold the seat cushion up and out of the way Lift the flap to expose the anchors and then lower the seat cushion See Rear Seat Operation on page 1 8 for additional information Be sure the cushion is locked into place 1 3 Put the child restraint on the seat 1 4 Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor if your vehicle has one Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps 2 1 Find the top tether anchor 2 2 Route attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions If your vehicle has a cargo shade route the top tether between the seatback and the cargo shade If the position you are using does not have a
211. form Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 76 Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure See Tire and Loading Information Label under Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 Inflation Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively Notice Do not let anyone tell you that under inflation or over inflation is all right It is not If your tires do not have enough air under inflation you can get the following Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Premature or irregular wear Poor handling Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air over inflation you can get the following Unusual wear Poor handling Rough ride Needless damage from
212. formation may result clean the entire surface After the cleaning process has been completed a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet Leather A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used Allow the leather to dry naturally Do not use heat to dry Never use steam to clean leather Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of the leather and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss ina non uniform manner Never use shoe polish on leather 5 99 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of the interior and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those co
213. formed was Maintenance I Always use Maintenance II whenever the message displays 10 months or more since the last service or if the message has not come on at all for one year Scheduled Maintenance Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 5 18 Reset oil life system See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 22 An Emission Control Service Visually check for any leaks or damage See footnote j Inspect engine air cleaner filter If necessary replace filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 24 See footnote k Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 72 and Tire Wear Inspection in At Least Once a Month on page 6 9 Inspect brake system See footnote a Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed pw Perform any needed additional services See Additional Required Services Low i in this section l Inspect suspension and steering components See footnote F Inspect engine cooling system Seefoomote Finspectwiner blades Seefoomoe g inspect restraint system components See oomo p po Lubricate body components See footnote f Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed See footnote g Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service I or II after the indicated miles kilometers shown for each item
214. from any underhood electric fan A CAUTION Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the surge tank 1 You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the surge tank pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap Remove the pressure cap 5 32 3 Fill the radiator with the proper DEX COOL coolant 4 Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL mixture up to the base of the filler neck See Engine COLD mark Coolant on page 5 30 for more information about the 5 proper coolant mixture Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank but leave the radiator pressure cap off 6 Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fan 7 By this time the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper DEX CO
215. fter the first prepaid year contact OnStar to select a monthly or annual subscription payment plan If a payment plan is not selected the OnStar system and all services including airbag notification and emergency services may be deactivated and no longer available For more information visit www onstar com U S or www onstar ca Canada or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services described below or for a full description of OnStar services and system limitations see the OnStar Owner s Guide in the glove box or visit www onstar com U S or www onstar ca Canada contact OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 or TTY 1 877 248 2080 or press the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day 7 days a week 2 35 OnStar Services Available with the Safe amp Sound Plan Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment Advanced Automatic Crash Notification AACN If equipped Link to Emergency Services Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance Remote Door Unlock Vehicle Alert OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email Remote Diagnostics OnStar Hands Free Calling with 30 trial minutes OnStar Virtual Advisor U S Only OnStar Services Included with Directions amp Connections Plan All Safe and Sound Plan Services OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation If equipped or Driving D
216. g as the dome override lamp override button is not pressed in When all the doors are closed the lamps stay on for a short period of time and then turn off automatically If you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the vehicle the interior lamps come on for a short time whether or not the dome lamp override is on Exit Lighting With exit lighting the interior lamps will come on when you remove the key from the ignition If the dome override is off these lights will stay on for a short period of time and then will go out Reading Lamps Press the indented part of the lenses on the reading lamps located in the overhead console to turn them on or off Electric Power Management The vehicle has Electric Power Management EPM that estimates the battery s temperature and state of charge It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery When the battery s state of charge is low the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up When the state of charge is high the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center DIC you may see the voltage move up or down This is normal If there is a problem an alert will be displayed The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high This is true for all vehicles This is because the generator al
217. g damaged If the mast becomes slightly bent straighten it out by hand If the mast is badly bent replace it Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is tightened to its base If tightening is required tighten by hand until fully seated plus one quarter turn XM Satellite Radio Antenna System The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of the vehicle Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for clear radio reception If the vehicle has a sunroof the performance of the XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open 3 99 42 NOTES 3 100 Section 4 Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle 4 2 Driving for Better Fuel Economy 4 2 Defensive Driving ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Drunk Driving i i onore tnn ben cedente nme tnb 4 3 Control of a Vehicle seeeeeeeeeeses 4 3 Braking e UE 4 4 Antilock Brake System ABS 4 5 Braking in Emergencies seeeeeeee 4 6 StabiliTrak System cccccccccceseeeeseeeeeeeseeees 4 6 Limited Slip Rear Axle iasoer 4 10 All Wheel Drive AWD System 4 10 SEEING E E tee Meni hewesndeehayectetnebenddarind 4 10 Off Road Recovery W sssseeeeeeereereerr renerne 4 12 Passing yas rss aee Henan Ehe 4 12 Loss Of Control art raa irere erre eene 4 12 Off Road Driving ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneenes 4 13 Driving Your Vehi
218. give additional technical service information needed to knowledgeably service Saab cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle Owner Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 U S plus processing fee Without Portfolio Owner Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 U S plus processing fee Current and Past Model Order Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model Saab 9 7x vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at helminc com Or you can write to Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Your Saab vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers tha
219. h one hand Then to move the trailer to the left move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle The vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps also flash telling other drivers the vehicle is turning changing lanes or stopping When towing a trailer the arrows on the instrument panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out For this reason you may think other drivers are seeing the signal when they are not It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working 4 37 Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade If the transmission is not shifted down the brakes might have to be used so much that they would get hot and no longer work well Vehicles can tow in D Drive Shift the transmiss
220. handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes brands or types may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the correct size brand and type of tires on your vehicle s wheels ACAUTION If you use bias ply tires on the vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle If you must replace your vehicle s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type radial and bias belted tires as your vehicle s original tires Vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system may give an inaccurate low pressure warning if non TPC spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle Non TPC Spec rated tires may give a low pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 67 Your vehicle s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 for more information about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle 5 75 Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires this may affect
221. hanging engine oil 3 38 Security Light For information regarding this light and the vehicle s security system see Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 16 Cruise Control Light If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC a this light will come on when the cruise control is set See Cruise Control on page 3 10 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 45 for more information Reduced Engine Power Light This light comes on when a noticeable reduction in the vehicle s performance occurs The vehicle can be driven at a reduced speed when the reduced engine power light is on but acceleration and speed may be reduced The performance may be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle If this light stays on see your dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair This light may also come on if there is a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If this happens take the vehicle in for service as soon as possible Highbeam On Light This light comes on when the high beam headlamps are in use See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 7 for more information 3 39 Service All Wheel Drive Light This light should come on briefly when you turn on the ignition as a check to show you it is working The service all wheel drive light comes on to indicate that there may be a problem with the drive system and service is required Malfunctions can be indicated b
222. harply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on the right Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes The passenger side mirror is convex shaped A convex mirror s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat Outside Heated Mirrors For vehicles with heated mirrors Gi Rear Defogger Press to heat the mirrors See Rear Window Defogger under Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 19 OnStar System OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to provide a wide range of safety security information and convenience services If the airbags deploy the system is designed to make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request emergency services be sent to your location If the keys are locked in the vehicle call OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlock the doors OnStar Hands Free Calling including 30 trial minutes good for 60 days is available on most vehicles OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation service with one trial route is available on most vehicles Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber glove box literature Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar A
223. he airbag deploys 1 38 A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no System is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 59 for additional information When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle Wherever a child restraint is installed be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in
224. he brake hydraulic system can also cause a low fluid level Have the brake hydraulic System fixed since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well Do not top off the brake fluid Adding fluid does not correct a leak If fluid is added when the linings are worn there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed Add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system A CAUTION If too much brake fluid is added it can spill on the engine and burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and the vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 5 39 Checking Brake Fluid Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 The fluid level should be above MIN If it is not have the brake hydraulic system checked to see if there is a leak Wiz RN SS m i NT n After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark What to Add Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container See Hecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area aroun
225. he manufacturer s instructions for adding When the vehicle needs windshield washer fluid be Water sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use Do not mix water with ready to use washer fluid If the vehicle will be operating in an area where the Water can cause the solution to freeze and temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that damage your washer fluid tank and other parts has sufficient protection against freezing of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as washer fluid Fill the washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Adding Washer Fluid Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full See Engine Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in your Compartment Overview on windshield washer It can damage the vehicle s page 5 12 for reservoir windshield washer system and paint location 5 38 Brakes Brake Fluid The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for DOT 3 the location of the reservoir Qi There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The brake fluid level goes down because of normal brake lining wear When new linings are installed the fluid level goes back up Afluid leak in t
226. he vehicle is started Cleaning the Mirror Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror Use a soft towel dampened with water 2 32 Compass Compass Operation There is a compass display on the upper right corner of the mirror Press CD to turn the compass display on or off Compass Calibration Press and hold D to activate the compass calibration mode CAL displays in the compass window on the mirror The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph 8 km h or less until the display reads a direction If after a few seconds the display does not show a compass direction N for North for example there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Interference can be caused by a magnetic antenna mount note pad holder or similar object If CAL appears in the compass window the compass may need to be reset or calibrated Compass Variance The mirror is set to zone eight Adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight Under certain circumstances such as during a long distance cross country trip it is necessary to adjust for compass variance If not adjusted to account for compass variance your compass could give false readings To adjust for compass variance 1 Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map Press and hold D until the zone number displays The number shown is the current zon
227. he water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down other wet weather driving tips include Allow extra following distance Pass with caution Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires on page 5 59 Turn off cruise control Before Leaving on a Long Trip To prepare your vehicle for a long trip consider having it serviced by your dealer retailer before departing Things to check on your own include Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir full Windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades In good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids All levels checked Lamps Do they all work and are lenses clean Tires Are treads good Are tires inflated to recommended pressure Weather and Maps Safe to travel Have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving If you become tired or sleepy find a safe place to park your vehicle and rest Other driving tips include Keep the vehicle well ventilated Keep interior temperature cool Keep your eyes moving scan the road ahead and to
228. headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether over the seatback If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether over the seatback Fold down the headrest or head restraint and route the single tether under the headrest or head restraint and in between the headrest or head restraint posts See Rear Seat Operation on page 1 8 Fold down the headrest or head restraint and route the dual tether around the headrest or head restraint See Rear Seat Operation on page 1 8 3 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 1 45 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle If your child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 39 for how and where to install your child restraint using LATCH If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 39 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child
229. hen your tires are cold See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them See High Speed Operation on page 5 66 for inflation pressure adjustment for high speed driving 5 59 Low Profile Performance Tire Tire Sidewall Labeling If your vehicle has P255 50R20 size tires they Useful information about a tire is molded into the are Classified as low profile performance tires sidewall The following illustration is an example These tires are designed for very responsive of a typical P Metric tire sidewall driving on wet or dry pavement You may also notice more road noise with low profile performance tires and that they tend to wear faster Notice If the vehicle has low profile tires they are more susceptible to damage from road hazards or curb impact than standard profile tires Tire and or wheel assembly damage can occur when coming into contact with road hazards like potholes or sharp edged objects or when sliding into a curb The vehicle warranty does not cover this type of damage Keep tires set to the correct inflation ty pressure and when possible avoid contact om with curbs potholes and other road hazards 5 qpe SPEC 1153 mg 75 i er exw
230. hetic oils will meet this GM standard Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M Notice Using oils that do not have the GM4718M Standard designation can cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty SAE 5W 30 SAE 5W 30 is best for the vehicle These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 American Petroleum Institute API starburst symbol Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API This vehicle s engine was filled at the factory with a Mobil 19 synthetic oil meeting all requirements for this vehicle Substitute Engine Oil When adding oil to maintain engine oil level oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M might not be available You can add substitute oil designated SAE 5W 30 with the starburst symbol at all temperatures Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M should not be used for an oil change 5 21 Cold Temperature Operation Except Vehicles with 6 0L V8 VIN Code H Engine If in an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C use either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 engine oil Both provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures Always use an oil that meets the required specification GM6094M See What Kind
231. hicle under normal driving conditions you should pull off the road stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 5 34 3 33 Tire Pressure Light For vehicles with a tire pressure light this light comes on briefly when the engine is started e and provides information about tire pressures and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System When the Light is On Steady This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly underinflated A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center DIC can accompany the light See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 45 for more information Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so If a tire is underinflated inflate to the proper pressure See Tires on page 5 59 for more information When the Light Flashes First and Then is On Steady This indicates that there could be a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitor System The light flashes for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the ignition cycle This sequence repeats with every ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 67 for more information 3 34 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light A computer system called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle help
232. hortly Loading The radio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly CH Off Air This channel is not currently in service Tune in to another channel Off Air This channel is not currently in service Tune to another channel CH Unauth This channel is blocked or cannot be received with your XM Subscription package Unauth This channel is blocked or cannot be received with your XM Subscription package CH Unavail This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button CH Unavl This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button No Info No artist song title category or text information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly Not Found There are no channels available for the selected category The system is working properly XM Locked The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message is received after having the vehicle serviced check with your dealer retailer XM Lock The XM receiver in your vehicle could have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes
233. ht of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle See Towing a Trailer on page 4 29 for important information on towing a trailer towing safety rules and trailering tips 4 23 A 4 24 Example 1 Description Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 68 kg x 2 Available Occupant and Cargo Weight 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg 700 Ibs 317 kg Example 2 Item Description Total A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 68 kg x 5 Available Cargo 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 750 Ibs 136 kg 250 Ibs 113 kg Refer to your vehicle s tire and loading information label for specific information about
234. icate the normal operating range The voltmeter gage may also read lower when in fuel economy mode This is normal Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an extended period This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle As engine speeds are increased this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone If you must drive turn off all unnecessary accessories Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible Brake System Warning Light When the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on when you set your parking brake The light will stay on if your parking brake does not release fully lf it stays on after your parking brake is fully released it means your vehicle has a brake problem A chime may also sound when the light comes on Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part is not working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on there could be a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right awa
235. icator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit see If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint under Passenger Sensing System on page 1 59 for more information To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position 6 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 1 51 Airbag System The vehicle has the following airbags A frontal airbag for the driver A frontal airbag for the right front passenger A roof rail airbag for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver e A roof rail airbag for the right front passenger and the passenger seated directly behind the right front passenger All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening For frontal airbags the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the right front passenger With roof r
236. ified locksmith how to make extra keys Keep this number in a safe place If you lose your keys you will be able to have new ones made easily using this number Your selling dealer retailer should also have this number Notice If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle you may have to damage the vehicle to get in Be sure you have spare keys If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle call the Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 The key cannot be removed from the ignition if your vehicle does not have power See gnition Positions on page 2 20 for additional information Remote Keyless Entry RKE System The Remote Keyless Entry RKE system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility c
237. il the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the brake pedal Then apply the parking brake and shift into P Park 5 Release the brake pedal Leaving After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply and hold the brake pedal while you start the engine shift into a gear and release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer See this manual s Maintenance Schedule or Index for more information Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid engine oil axle lubricant belts cooling system and brake system It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Trailer Wiring Harness The vehicle may have a seven wire trailer towing harness This harness may have a seven pin universal heavy duty trailer connector if equipped with the trailering package that is attached to a bracket on the hitch platform or included with the four pin trailer towing harness If the vehicle is not equipped with the heavy duty trailer connector one may be purchased from your dealer retailer 4 39 The seven wire harness contains the following trailer circuits Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal Dark Green Right Sto
238. ill not be able to protect the child correctly In a crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Install a LATCH type child restraint properly using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual A CAUTION Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash attach only one child restraint per anchor 1 43 A CAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Buckle any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock if your vehicle has one after the child restraint has been installed Notice Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle s safety belts This may damage these parts If necessary move buckled safety belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt buckled This could damage the safety belt or the seat Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its stowed position be
239. ill weigh more than these limits Ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Safety Chains Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes A loaded trailer that weighs more than 1 500 Ibs 680 kg needs to have its own brake system that is adequate for the weight of the trailer Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed adjusted and maintained properly Since the vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak the trailer brakes cannot tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system 4 35 Driving with a Trailer A CAUTION When towing a trailer exhaust gases may collect at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate trunk hatch or rear most window is open Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death To maximize safety when towing a trailer e Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting a trip Never drive with the liftgate trunk hatch or rear most window open Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in o
240. illamp D Sidemarker Lamp To replace one of these bulbs 4 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it 1 Open the liftgate See Liftgate Liftglass on rom the tallamp assemoy page 2 12 5 Holding the socket pull the bulb to release it from 2R h the socket i ie eine 6 Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks assembly 7 Insert the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly and turn it clockwise to secure 8 Reinstall the taillamp assembly by lining up the locator pins with the retainers in the body of the vehicle 9 Reinstall the two screws 3 Pull the taillamp assembly away from the vehicle 5 54 License Plate Lamp Replacement Bulbs 1 0a A CO nnm Remove the two screws holding the license plate Halogen Headlamps High Beam 9005 Low Beam Halogen Only Rear Turn Signal 3757 AK Stoplamp and Taillamp 3157 For replacement bulbs not listed here contact your Pull the lens away from the lamp assembly dealer retailer Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks Replace the lamp assembly lens and tighten the screws Windshield Replacement Your vehicle is equipped with an acoustic windshield If you ever have to have your windshield replaced be sure to get an acoustic windshield so you will continue to have the benefits an acoustic windshield can provide Windshield Wiper Blade Repla
241. imum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 Tire Size The following examples show the different parts of a tire size P245 75R16 109S TUT B CD Passenger P Metric Tire A Passenger P Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 75 as shown in item C of the passenger P Metric tire illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description The service description indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire The load index can ra
242. ing a Trailer on page 4 29 Make sure the shift lever is fully in P Park before starting the engine The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to apply the brake pedal then press the shift lever button before you can shift from P Park when the ignition key is in ON RUN lf you cannot shift out of P Park ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into P Park as you maintain brake application Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another gear See Shifting Out of Park on page 2 29 R Reverse Use this gear to back up Notice Shifting to R Reverse while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Shift to R Reverse only after the vehicle is stopped To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging the transmission see f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 20 N Neutral In this position the engine does not connect with the wheels To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving use N Neutral only ACAUTION Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is r
243. ing to produce a cleaner environment This light should come on when the ignition is on but the engine is not running as a check to show it working If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the check engine light comes on and stays on while the engine is running this indicates that there is an OBD II problem and service is required Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle This system assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction Notice If the vehicle is continually driven with this light on after a while the emission controls might not work as well the vehicle s fuel economy might not be as good and the engine might not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Notice Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect the vehicle s emission controls and can cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 This light co
244. installed on your vehicle when it was new were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC spec system rating If you need replacement tires GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating This way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety during normal use as the original tires GM s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle including brake system performance ride and handling traction control and tire pressure monitoring performance GM s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire s sidewall near the tire size If the tires have an all season tread design the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS for mud and snow See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5 60 for additional information GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were new Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 72 for information on proper tire rotation ACAUTION Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes brands or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not
245. ion but it does not replace normal tire maintenance See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 72 and Tires on page 5 59 Notice Using non approved tire sealants could damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors TPMS sensor damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty Always use the GM approved tire sealant available through your dealer retailer 5 69 TPMS Malfunction Light and Message The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable When the system detects a malfunction the low tire warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle A DIC warning message is also displayed The low tire warning light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected Some of the conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come on are One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor The TPMS sensor matching process was started but not completed or not completed successfully after rotating the vehicle s tires The DIC message and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS sensor matching process is performed successfully See TPMS Sensor Matching Pro
246. ion to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and or hilly conditions When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes If the engine is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades the vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the automatic transmission in P Park for a few minutes before turning the engine off For vehicles with manual transmissions let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the transmission out of gear and the parking brake applied for a few minutes before turning the engine off If the overheat warning comes on see Engine Overheating on page 5 34 4 38 Parking on Hills ACAUTION Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous If something goes wrong the rig could start to move People can be injured and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged When possible always park the rig on a flat surface If parking the rig on a hill 1 Press the brake pedal but do not shift into P Park yet Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the brake pedal unt
247. irections Advisor delivered RideAssist Information and Convenience Services 2 36 OnStar Hands Free Calling OnStar Hands Free Calling allows eligible OnStar subscribers to make and receive calls using voice commands Hands Free Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle and can be used with OnStar Pre Paid Minute Packages Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes good for 60 days Hands Free Calling can also be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U S or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada depending on eligibility To find out more refer to the OnStar Owner s Guide in the vehicle s glove box visit www onstar com or www onstar ca or speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation Vehicles with the OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation system can provide voice guided driving directions Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor locate a business or address and download driving directions to the vehicle Voice guided directions to the desired destination will play through the audio system speakers See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information OnStar Virtual Advisor OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling that uses minutes to access location based weather local traffic reports and stock quotes Press the phone button and give a few simple voice commands to browse through the various
248. is feature lets high beam headlamps be used to signal to a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even if the headlamps are in the automatic position To use it pull the turn signal lever toward you then release it If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam the high beam headlamps turn on They will stay on as long as the lever is held toward you The high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster comes on Release the lever to return to normal operation Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of the steering column Move the lever to control the windshield wipers 3 8 ww S Mist Pull the lever down and release it for a single wiping cycle The lever will return to its original position Hold the lever down longer for more wipe cycles Q Off Turns off the wipers S Delay Sets a delay between wipes Turn the delay adjustment band to set the length of the delay 202 Delay Adjustment Use this band to set the length of the delay between wipes when using the delay feature The closer the band is moved toward mist the longer the delay The windshield wiper lever must be in delay for this feature to work GERD Low Speed For steady wiping at low speed High Speed For wiping a high speed If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds while you are driving the exterior lamps will come on automatically if the ext
249. is held or pressed more than once the player continues moving backward through the CD 2 Fast Forward Press to fast forward within the track If 2 PF is held or pressed more than once the player continues moving forward through the CD 3 gt Repeat Press to hear a track over again RPT On displays The current track continues to repeat Press again to turn off repeat play RPT OFF displays 4 A Random To random the tracks in the current folder or playlist press and release 4 FLDR RDM displays Once all of the tracks in the current folder or playlist have played the system moves on to the next folder or playlist and plays all of the tracks in random order To play all the tracks on the CD in random order press and hold 4 x for two seconds A beep sounds and CD RDM displays This feature does not work with playlists When in random pressing and releasing either SEEK arrow takes the CD to the next or previous randomized track Press and release 4 again to turn off random play NO RDM displays 5 Previous Folder Press to go to the first track in the previous folder Pressing 5 J while in folder random mode takes the CD to the previous folder and randomizes the tracks in that folder 6 Next Folder Press to go to the first track in the next folder Pressing 6 LA while in folder random mode takes the CD to the next folder and randomizes the tracks in that folder I4 SEEK Pl Pr
250. is stuck in the player The Load Eject button does not work If the stop button was pressed one time the DVD player will resume playing where the DVD was stopped If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player will begin to play from the beginning of the DVD Check that the DVD player is in the auxiliary source mode Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Turn the DVD power off then on then press the load eject button on the DVD player Do not attempt to forcibly remove the disc from the DVD player This could permanently damage the disc and DVD player 3 93 Recommended Action Sometimes the wireless Check for obstructions headphone audio cuts out low batteries reception or buzzes range and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using a cellular telephone in the vehicle Check that the headphones are facing the front of the vehicle lost the remote and or See your dealer retailer the headphones for assistance The DVD is playing but there is no picture or sound Check that the DVD player is in DVD mode The audio video skips The DVD or CD could be or jumps dirty scratched or damaged The audio from the radio for the Radio with Six Disc CD and XM has taken over the audio from the DVD or CD when using the wired headphones The RSE is working correctly Use the wireless headphones or have the front seat passengers listen to another a
251. it But if a safety belt is not long enough your dealer retailer will order you an extender When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To help avoid personal injury do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender 1 28 Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts The manufacturer s instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster Use a booster seat with a lap shoulder belt until the child passes the below fit test Sit all the way back on the seat Do the knees bend at the seat edge If yes continue If no return to the booster seat Buckle the lap shoulder belt Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder If yes continue If no try using the rear safety belt comfort guide See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 23 for more information If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder then return to the booster seat Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips touching the thighs If yes continue If no return to the booster seat
252. ition You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system The security light will come on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft deterrent system When the PASS Key III system senses that someone is using the wrong key it shuts down the vehicle s starter and fuel systems The starter will not work and fuel will stop being delivered to the engine Anyone using a trial and error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not start and the SECURITY light comes on there may be a problem with your theft deterrent system Turn the ignition off and try again If the engine still does not start and the key appears to be undamaged try another ignition key At this time you may also want to check the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 107 If the engine still does not start with the other key your vehicle needs service If your vehicle does start the first key may be faulty See your dealer retailer who can service the PASS Key III to have a new key made It is possible for the PASS Key Ill decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle This procedure is for programming additional keys only Canadian Owners If you lose or damage your keys only a dealer retailer can service PASS Key III to have new keys made To program additi
253. k In New Vehicle eese 2 19 Bulb Replacement eeeeeeeeeeeees 5 50 Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking Lam ps 5 eie teo rte Ree tud 5 53 Halogen BUDS ert rrt thi nas 5 51 Headlamp Aiming annassa 5 50 Headlamps i oie EREE 5 51 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 5 50 License Plate Lamps eeseseese 5 55 Replacement Bulbs seeessese 5 55 Taillamps Turn Signal Sidemarker Stoplamps and Back Up Lamps 5 53 Buying New Tires eese 5 74 Galibrati on CL 2 32 California Fuels 2 uice inerte tesa nennt 5 6 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 5 3 California Proposition 65 Warning 5 3 Canadian Owners iiec nonea aeaii aiai ji Capacities and Specifications 5 113 Carbon Monoxide 2 12 2 30 4 18 Care of Safety Belts 2 0 0 0 cece ceeeeee eects eee eeaeeeees 5 100 Cargo COVER qc 2 46 Cargo Tie DOWNS 5 saae ce ninr pnt t Redes 2 47 CD MIPS enin ae E REE P E 3 68 Center Console Storage Area ss 2 44 Chains Tire cccccccceececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 5 80 Charging System Light seesssssssss 3 30 Check Engine Lamp ss aier maenna anias eia 3 34 Gages Warning Light esses 3 40 Check Gas Cap Light rarere eee
254. ks for delivery Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 4 years 50 000 miles 80 000 km New Vehicle Bumper to Bumper Limited Warranty period Items considered are hotel meals and rental car Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance Impound towing caused by violation of any laws Legal fines Mounting dismounting or changing of snow tires chains or other traction devices Towing or services for vehicles driven on a non public road or highway Services Specific to Canadian Purchased Vehicles Fuel delivery Reimbursement is approximately 5 Canadian Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service Lock Out Service Vehicle registration is required Trip Routing Service Limit of six requests per year Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance Must be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was started to qualify General Motors of Canada Limited requires pre authorization original detailed receipts and a copy of the repair orders Once authorization has been received the Roadside Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements and explain how to receive payment Alternative Service If assistance cannot be provided right away the Roadside Assistance advisor may give you permission to get local emergency road service You will re
255. le To install the cargo cover do the following 1 Align the endcap with the pocket in the trim panel located behind the rear seat 2 Squeeze the opposite endcap align it with the pocket located on the opposite side of the trim panel and release 3 Grasp the handle and unroll the cover Latch the posts into the sockets on the inside of the vehicle to secure it 2 46 To remove the cargo cover do the following 1 Release the cover from the latch posts and carefully roll it back up Squeeze one endcap and remove it from the pocket in the trim panel Remove the cargo cover from the other endcap so that the shade can be removed from the vehicle A CAUTION An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver Someone could be injured If the cover is removed always store it in the proper storage location When it is replaced always be sure that it is securely reattached Cargo Tie Downs Four cargo tie downs are located in the rear compartment of the vehicle The tie downs can be used to secure small loads Moonroof The vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding moonroof The ignition must be turned to ON RUN ACC ACCESSORY or Retained Accessory Power RAP must be active to operate it See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 21 The moonroof switch is located in the overhead console lea Press and release the back of the button to
256. le Customization on page 3 51 for more information lt a Select Press this button to reset certain DIC functions and set your customization settings Pressing any of the DIC buttons will acknowledge DIC messages and clear them from the DIC display DIC Operation and Displays The DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off If a problem is detected a warning message will appear on the display Pressing the trip stem on the instrument panel cluster or any of the DIC buttons will acknowledge any warning or service messages You should take any message that appears on the display seriously and remember that clearing the message will only make the message disappear not correct the problem The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by pressing the four DIC buttons located on the center of the instrument panel above the radio These buttons are fuel information trip information customization and select The button functions are detailed in the following pages Fuel Information Button PN Fuel Information Press this button to scroll through the fuel range fuel used average fuel economy and the engine oil life system Fuel Range Press the fuel information button until RANGE appears on the display This mode shows the remaining distance you can drive without refueling It is based on fuel economy and th
257. le hits a stationary object the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object If the vehicle hits an object that deforms the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform 1 56 e If the vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like a wall If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts In addition your vehicle has dual stage frontal airbags Dual stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity Your vehicle has electronic frontal sensors which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact For moderate frontal impacts dual stage airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment For more severe frontal impacts full deployment occurs Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enables the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver s and right front passenger s seat The sensors provide information that is used to determine if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or a
258. lease 2 until BAL balance displays Turn e to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers To adjust the fade between the front and the rear speakers push and release 2 until FADE displays Turn e to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle position while in fade or balance push e then push it again and hold it until one beep sounds To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position push and hold 2 when no tone or speaker control is displayed ALL CENTERED displays and a beep sounds 3 62 Finding a Category CAT Station XM Satellite Radio Service Only To select and find a desired category 1 Press the CAT button to activate category select mode The current category displays 2 Turn the tune knob to select a category 3 Press either SEEK arrow once the desired category is displayed to go to that category s first station 4 Press either SEEK arrow again to go to another station within that category and the category is displayed If CAT disappears from the display go back to Step 1 5 Press CAT to exit category select mode or wait for CAT to time out If the radio cannot find the desired category NOT FOUND displays and the radio returns to the last station being played Radio Messages CAL ERR Calibration Error Displays if the radio is no longer calibrated properly for the vehicle The vehicle must be retur
259. lets De Bi Level Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor outlets Some air is directed toward the windshield and side window outlets Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets ted Floor Air is directed to the floor outlets Some air also comes out of the defroster and side window outlets The recirculation button cannot be selected in floor mode 5 Defog This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture Air is directed to the floor and windshield outlets W Front Defrost Press the front defrost button to clear the windows of fog or frost more quickly The system automatically controls the fan speed if defrost is selected from AUTO mode If the outside temperature is 40 F 4 C or warmer the air conditioning compressor runs automatically to help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear X A C Air Conditioning Press to turn the air conditioning system on or off When the system is on the system automatically begins to cool and dehumidify the air inside of the vehicle The air conditioning symbol appears on the display when the air conditioning is on and turns off when the air conditioning is off If the air conditioning is turned off while in front defrost or defog mode the air conditioning symbol turns off however the A C compressor remains on to help de humidify the air inside the vehicle If one
260. lling when the vehicle is changed into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up lf one or more of these conditions occurs change the fuel brand used It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 turn the light off If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle of water the vehicle s electrical system might be wet The condition is usually corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off 3 36 If none of the above have made the light turn off your dealer retailer can check the vehicle The dealer retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or might begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on the vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass an inspection The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on with the engine running or if the key is in ON RUN and the light is not on The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II on board diagnostic system determines that critical e
261. locking tab locks in the hook slot Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly onto the windshield 5 57 Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement 1 Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out of the park rest position 2 Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the backglass The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position so care should be used when pulling it away from the vehicle 3 Rotate the wiper blade assembly and pull it off of the wiper arm Hold the wiper arm in position and push the blade away from the wiper arm 5 58 4 Replace the wiper blade 5 Return the wiper blade assembly to the park rest position Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your vehicle Warranty booklet for details For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer ACAUTION Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked w
262. loth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent Wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades Bugs road grime sap and a buildup of vehicle wash wax treatments may cause wiper streaking Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged Wipers can be damaged by Extreme dusty conditions Sand and salt Heat and sun Snow and ice without proper removal Aluminum Wheels Notice Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium calcium or sodium chloride These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust Always wash the vehicle s chrome with soap and water after exposure Notice Using strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome plated wheels could damage the surface of the wheel s The repairs would not be covered by the warranty Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome plated wheels Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied Notice Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by the warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of th
263. lows 1 Park the vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running 2 With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in P Park 3 With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in P Park 4 Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps 1 Flip the handle up and then remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel The automatic transmission dipstick handle with this symbol on it is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location 2 Reinstall it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again If the dipstick does not go down the tube easily turn the blade and try again until it is fully inserted in the tube SHOTS Lou Kax 3 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level The fluid level must be in the COLD area below the cross hatched area for a cold check or in the HOT or cross hatched area for a hot check Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an accurate reading If the fluid level is in the acceptable range reinstall the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 5 27 Consistency of Readings Alw
264. ls available from your dealer retailer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s retailer s body and paint shop 5 104 Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer retailer or an underbody car washing system can do this Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this Saab will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UX1M072675 This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument
265. ly Put the shift lever in P Park If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in Neutral CAUTION Continued 5 82 CAUTION Continued Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle When the vehicle has a flat tire B use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks A A Wheel Block B Flat Tire The following information explains how to use the jack and change a tire Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The jacking equipment you will need is stored under the rear seat on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Rear Seat Operation on page 1 8 for more information To release the jack from its holder turn the knob on the jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head Wheel Wrench Hoist Shaft Extension Retainer Spare or Flat Tire Valve Stem Pointed Up moom The tools you will be using include the wheel wrench A heel blocks B extension s socket end C NC handle ack end and nek n PEE The following instructions explain how to remove the underbody mounted spare located underneath your vehicle Notice f you remove or res
266. me infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people or can be thrown out of the vehicle 1 31 A CAUTION Never do this Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle Due to crash forces an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 Ib 5 5 kg infant will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on a person s arms An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint 1 32 ACAUTION Never do this Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat Secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat It is also better to secure a forward facing child restraint in a rear seat If you must secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go Q What are the different types of add on child A restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will b
267. me Remote Keep the original hand held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote programming It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes See Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons later in this section When programming a garage door park outside of the garage Park directly in line with and facing the garage door opener motor head or gate motor head Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is being programmed It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 2 39 Programming the Universal Home Remote System For questions or help programming the Universal Home Remote System call 1 800 355 3515 or go to www homelink com Programming a garage door opener involves time sensitive actions so read the entire procedure before starting Otherwise the device will time out and the procedure will have to be repeated To program up to three devices 1 From inside the vehicle press and hold down the two outside buttons at the same time releasing only when the Universal Home Remote indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds This step will erase the factory settings or all previously programmed buttons Do not hold down the buttons for l
268. me unless the folder mode was chosen as the default display See DISP later in this section for more information The new track name displays 3 69 File System and Naming The song name that is displayed is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename does not display Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created by WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however they cannot be edited using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Playing an MP3 Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and READING displays The CD should begin playing and the CD symbol displays To insert a CD with the ignition off first press the eject button or the DISP display knob 3 70 If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number displays 14 Reverse Press to reverse within the same track If 1
269. me you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It ls Time for New Tires on page 5 73 and Wheel Replacement on page 5 79 5 72 When rotating your tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 69 Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 5 113 ACAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 82 Make sure the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves tighten the cable See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 94 When It Is Time for New Tires Various fa
270. ment Fuse Block The engine compartment fuse block is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location Notice Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it Always keep the covers on any electrical component 5 107 s HE i ee e HA h 47 ES 41 kol IO o P H 38 39 40 Electronically Controlled Air LL Bee ur Side Headlamp Suspension Low Beam Passenger Side Headlamp Trailer Back Up High Beam Driver Side Headlamp High Beam Fuses J Usse 6 Driver Side Headlamp Low Beam 8 Automatic Transfer Case 9 Windshield Washer Canister Instrument Panel Cluster Driver Information Center DIC Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Backup Lamps Engine Control Module 1 Fuses Use 66 Regulated Voltage Control XCaseFuses Usage 5 109 Vehicle Stability Enhancement System StabiliTrak 5 jArPum Relays Use Headlamp Wiper Rear Windshield Wiper Washer 60 Powemi Oo O 5 110 Relays Use Air Solenoid Ignition 1 Instrument Panel Battery Rear Underseat Fuse Block The rear underseat fuse block is located on the driver side of the vehicle under the second row seat Pull the seat cushion forward to access the fuse block Fuss J Usse o Bak SS
271. mes on during a malfunction in one of two ways Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle Reduce vehicle speed Avoid hard accelerations Avoid steep uphill grades If towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park the vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible 3 35 Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on the vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required An emission system malfunction might be corrected by doing the following Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed See Filling the Tank on page 5 8 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed and can cause stalling after start up sta
272. minder Light Several seconds after the engine is started a chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt This only occurs if the passenger airbag is enabled See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 59 for more information The passenger safety belt light located on the instrument panel comes on and stays on for several seconds and then flashes for several more This chime and light are repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion 2 If the passenger safety belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on 3 27 Airbag Readiness Light The system checks the airbag s electrical system for possible malfunctions If the light stays on it indicates there is an electrical problem The system check includes the airbag sensor the pretensioners the airbag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the airbag system see Airbag System on page 1 52 The airbag readiness light flashes for a few seconds when the engine is started If the light does not come on then have it fixed immediately 3 28 A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving it means the airbag system might not be working properly The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury have the vehicl
273. mission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if the battery has recently been replaced or if the battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This can take several days of routine driving If this has been done and the vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness your dealer retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection Oil Pressure Gage ST L H Canada United States The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi pounds per square inch when the engine is running Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa kilopascals Oil pressure may vary with engine speed outside temperature and oil viscosity but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range 3 37 A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or other problems causing low oil pressure A CAUTION Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low The engine can become so hot that it catches fire Someone could be burned Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for c
274. mited Warranty and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty Repair Facility Saab also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs Your Saab dealer may have a collision repair center with Saab trained technicians and state of the art equipment or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has Saab trained technicians and comparable equipment Insuring Your Vehicle Protect your investment in your Saab vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your Saab vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts When purchasing insurance we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with Saab original equipment collision parts If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier consider switching to another insurance carrier If your vehicle is leased the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assures repairs with Genuine Saab Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts Read your lease carefully as you may be charged at the end of your lease for po
275. mitter being used to unlock the vehicle is the one that will be recalled To select a setting and move on to the next feature press E while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC See Easy Exit Seat under Memory Seat on page 1 3 for more information Alarm Warning Press Ef until ALARM WARNING BOTH appears in the display To select your preference for alarm warning press lt while ALARM WARNING BOTH is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt will scroll through the following settings ALARM WARNING BOTH default The headlamps will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is active ALARM WARNING HORN The horn will chirp when the alarm is active ALARM WARNING LAMPS The headlamps will flash when the alarm is active ALARM WARNING OFF There will be no alarm warning on activation To select a setting and move on to the next feature press EK while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC See Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 16 for more information 3 55 Language Press Ef until LANGUAGE ENGLISH appears in the display To select your preference for display language press lt while LANGUAGE ENGLISH is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt will scroll through the following settings ENGLISH default All messages will appear in English FRANCAIS All messages will appear in French ESPANOL All messages will appear in Spanish To select a setting and move on to
276. ms between you your dealer retailer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue S E Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect notify Transport Canada immediately in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited Call them at 1 800 333 0510 or write to Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 Reporting Safety Defects to Saab In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this please notify Saab Call 1 800 955 9007 or write Saab Cars USA Inc Saab Customer Assistance Center 4405 A International Boulevard Norcross GA 30093 In Canada call 1 800 263 1999 English or French or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 7 14 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc Service Bulletins Service Bulletins
277. n the vehicle still has brakes but not antilock 3 32 brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 31 For vehicles with a Driver Information Center DIC see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 45 for all brake related DIC messages StabiliTrak Service Light This light will come on tu briefly when the engine is started This light will come on if a problem is detected in the StabiliTrak system For more information see StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 StabiliTrak Indicator Light This warning light should come on briefly when the engine is started During most driving conditions this light will not come on If the StabiliTrak System is actively controlling the stability and or traction of the vehicle this light will flash This is normal This light will come on if any portion of the system has been manually turned off or a problem is detected in the system If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center a message will appear also see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 45 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 for more information Engine Coolant Temperature Gage United States Canada This gage shows the engine coolant temperature If the gage pointer moves into the red area the engine coolant has overheated If you have been operating your ve
278. n and the key is in the ignition all the doors will lock and then the driver s door will unlock Liftgate Liftglass A CAUTION It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or liftglass open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You cannot see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftgate or liftglass Make sure all other windows are shut e Turn the fan on your climate control system to its highest speed and select the control setting that will force outside air into your vehicle See Climate Control System in the Index If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way See Engine Exhaust on page 2 30 Liftgate Release To unlock the liftgate use the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 The liftglass will also unlock when the liftgate is unlocked Press the button on the liftglass to open it To open the entire liftgate lift the handle located in the center of the liftgate When the liftgate is opened the liftglass will lock after a short delay Emergency Release for Opening Liftgate 1 Remove the trim plug located on the inside of the liftgate in the center to expose the access hole in the trim panel
279. n the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 5 113 Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer retailer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign that brake service might be required Brake Adjustment Every brake stop the disc brakes adjust for wear 5 41 Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking The vehicle was designed and tested with top quality brake parts When parts of the braking system are replaced for example when the brake linings wear down and new ones are installed be sure to get new approved replacement parts If this is not done the brakes might not work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle the balance between the front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed
280. n to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed Open the windows as necessary 3 In heavy traffic let the engine idle in N Neutral while stopped If it is safe to do so pull off the road shift to P Park or N Neutral and let the engine idle If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays the vehicle can be driven Continue to drive the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes Keep a safe vehicle distance from the car in front of you If the warning does not come back on continue to drive normally 5 36 If the warning continues pull over stop and park the vehicle right away If there is no sign of steam idle the engine for three minutes while parked If the warning is still displayed turn off the engine until it cools down Engine Fan Noise The vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan When the clutch is engaged the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine In most everyday driving conditions the clutch is not engaged This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures the fan speed increases when the clutch engages so you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts It is merely the cooling system functioning properly The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not r
281. n you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately ACAUTION Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not connect positive to negative or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And do not connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks 6 Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the dead battery Usea remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Do notlet the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Now connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the good battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not let the other
282. nd model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN insurance company and policy number and a general description of the damage to the other vehicle If possible call your insurance company from the scene of the crash They will walk you through the information they will need If they ask for a police report phone or go to the police department headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee In some states provinces with no fault insurance laws a report may not be necessary This is especially true if there are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your vehicle Whether you select a Saab dealer or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage make sure you are comfortable with them Remember you will have to feel comfortable with their work for a long time Once you have an estimate read it carefully and make sure you understand what work will be performed on your vehicle If you have a question ask for an explanation Reputable shops welcome this opportunity Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs Saab recommends that you take an active role in its repair If you have a pre determined repair facility of choice take your vehicle there or have it towed there Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts either new
283. nd the vehicle Your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 14 A CAUTION For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the airbag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Q Is there anything might add to or change about the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly A Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system height front end or side sheet metal they may keep the airbag system from working properly Changing or moving any parts of the front seats safety belts the airbag sensing and diagnostic module steering wheel instrument panel roof rail airbag modules ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim rearview mirror front sensors rollover sensor module or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system In addition your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger s position which includes sensors that are part of the passenger s seat The pas
284. nd then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible A CAUTION Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training If a jack is provided with the vehicle it is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack If a jack is provided with the vehicle only use it for changing a flat tire If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use the jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely 5 81 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on the hazard warning flashers See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 Changing a tire can be dangerous The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people You and they could be badly injured or even killed Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firm
285. nd you that the airbag is off See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 29 The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on may inflate the right front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active For some children who have outgrown child restraints and for very small adults the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag depending upon the person s seating posture and body build Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person Z CAUTION If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 28 for more information including important safety information 1 61 If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit T 2 3 Turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers
286. ne Move the shift lever to P Park or N Neutral The engine will not start in any other position To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving use N Neutral only Notice Do not try to shift to P Park if the vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to P Park only when the vehicle is stopped Starting Procedure 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will slow down as the engine warms Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts The vehicle has a Computer Controlled Cranking System This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components If the ignition key is turned to the START position and then released when the engine begins cranking the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts If the engine does not start and the key is held in START cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage To prevent gear damage this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF position Notice Cranking the engine for long periods of time by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking h
287. ne 2 47 Capacities and Specifications RNC HRS 5 113 Instrument Panel eeeeeeeeeeses 3 1 Maintenance Schedule 6 1 Instrument Panel Overview 3 4 Maintenance Schedule 6 2 Climate Controls iusserit 3 19 Customer Assistance Information 7 1 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 24 Customer Assistance and Information 7 2 Driver Information Center DIC 3 42 Reporting Safety Defects 7 13 Audio System s isses eee tese reines 3 57 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 7 15 nte erene ERE 1 Ei SAAB Saab Automobile Saab Cars USA SAAB Saab 9 7X 9 7X and the Saab Emblem are registered trademarks of Saab Automobile AB This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed Saab reserves the right to make changes after that time without further notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for Saab Automobile AB wherever it appears in this manual This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about the vehicle s features and controls Pictures symbols and words work together to explain vehicle operation Keep this manual in the vehicle for q
288. ned to your dealer retailer for service LOC Locked Displays when the THEFTLOCK system has activated Take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer Radio Messages for XM Only See XM Radio Messages on page 3 72 later in this section for further detail Playing a CD Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing To insert a CD with the ignition off first press the eject button or the DISP display knob If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source When the CD is inserted READING and the CD symbol displays As each new track starts to play the track number also displays The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner For vehicles that have a radio with a Six Disc CD player LOAD Press this button to load CDs into the CD player This CD player holds up to six CDs To insert one CD 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press and release the LOAD button 3 Wait for the indicator light located to the right of the slot to turn green 4 Load a CD Insert the CD partway into the slot label sid
289. ness contrast display mode and dynamic range compression The dynamic range compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase low audio produced by some DVDs To change a feature back to the factory default setting press this button to display the feature then press and hold until the default setting displays While playing an Audio or DVD disc press and hold LJ to display and to remove the track and time information A V lt P Menu Navigation Arrows Use the arrows to navigate through a menu Enter Press to select the choices that are highlighted in any menu DVD Player Buttons With Sunroof gt Play Pause Press to start play of a DVD or CD Press while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it Press again to continue the play of the DVD or CD Bl A Stop Eject Press to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD or CD Press this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD Press and hold this button for more than three seconds to eject a DVD or CD Playing a Disc To play a disc gently insert the disc with the label side up into the loading slot The DVD player will continue loading the disc and the player will automatically start if the vehicle is in ON RUN ACC ACCESSORY or when RAP is active If a disc is already in the player press the play pause button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote control Some DVDs will not allow fast for
290. ng and driving In recent years more than 17 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with about 250 000 people injured For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Control of a Vehicle The following three systems help to control the vehicle while driving brakes steering and accelerator At times as when driving on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide Meaning you can lose control of the vehicle Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 31 Braking action involves perception time and reaction time Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time Actually doing it is reaction time Average reaction
291. nge from 1 to 279 Speed ratings range from A to Z 5 62 Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in atire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 Curb Weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transp
292. nly outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 2 30 4 36 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself Before starting check all trailer hitch parts and attachments safety chains electrical connectors lamps tires and mirror adjustments If the trailer has electric brakes start the vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This checks the electrical connection at the same time During the trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer This can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer Because the rig is longer it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel wit
293. normal effort If the shift lever moves out of P Park contact your dealer retailer for service Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition to LOCK OFF in each shift lever position The ignition should turn to LOCK OFF only when the shift lever is in P Park The ignition key should come out only in LOCK OFF Contact your dealer retailer if service is required Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission P Park Mechanism Check A CAUTION When you are doing this check the vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and the transmission in N Neutral slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only To check the P Park mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to P Park Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Contact your dealer retailer if service is required Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush an
294. ntaining organic solvents to clean the vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Some commercial products may increase gloss on the instrument panel The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions 5 100 Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry A CAUTION Do not bleach or dye safety belts It may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve the vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often Notice Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle Check the cleaning product label If it states that it should not be used on plastic parts do not use it on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be covered by the warranty Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight Use a car washing soap Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or
295. ntrols Easy Exit Seat The control for the easy exit seat function is located on the driver s door below the memory buttons 1 and 2 The easy exit seat button is used to program and recall the desired driver s seat position when exiting or entering the vehicle The power lumbar recline and if equipped adjustable pedal positions will not be stored or recalled when using the easy exit seat function The seat position can be saved for up to two drivers To store the easy exit seat position 1 Press and release the 1 or 2 button of the memory control for less than three seconds The seat will move to the stored memory position 2 Adjust the seat to the desired exit position 3 Press and hold the easy exit seat button for more than three seconds A double chime will sound to let you know that the position has been stored for the selected button 1 or 2 To repeat the procedure for a second driver follow the Power Reclining Seatbacks preceding steps but press the other numbered memory control button The front seats have power reclining seatbacks To recall the easy exit seat position Use the vertical power Press the easy exit seat button on the memory seat control located on the control while the vehicle is in PARK P The seat outboard side of the will move to the stored exit position seat to operate them Seo Or if the easy exit seat feature is activated in the Driver Information Center DIC removing the k
296. o do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads The cruise controls are Setting Cruise Control located on the end of the turn signal multifunction lever ACAUTION lf you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control On Turns the system on Resume Accelerate Makes the vehicle accelerate Move the cruise control switch to or resume to a previously set speed Get up to the desired speed m Set Press this button to set the speed Press at the end of the lever and release it Bc Wm Q Off Turns the system off Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Some vehicles have a cruise light on the a instrument panel cluster that comes on when the cruise control is engaged Resuming a Set Speed Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied This disengages the cruise control But it does not need to be reset Once the vehicle is going about 25 mph 40 km h or more move the cruise control switch briefly from to The vehicle returns to
297. o 70 mph 112 km h at the recommended inflation pressure so you can finish your trip Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed back onto your vehicle This way a spare tire will be available in case you need it again Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes because they will not fit Keep your spare tire and its wheel together Appearance Care Interior Cleaning The vehicle s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often Although not always visible dust and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery Dirt can damage carpet fabric leather and plastic surfaces Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the upholstery It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled Soils should be removed as quickly as possible The vehicle s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer color to the vehicle s interior 5 97 When cleaning the vehicle s interior only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended Use glass cleaner only on glass Remove any accidental over spray from other surfaces immediately To pre
298. o seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with the programming Steps 6 through 8 It may be helpful to have another person assist with the remaining steps Sap pinnae orc 18 After Steps 1 through 5 have been completed locate inside the garage the garage door opener receiver motor head unit Locate the Learn or Smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer 7 Firmly press and release the Learn or Smart button After you press this button you will have 30 seconds to complete Step 8 8 Immediately return to the vehicle Firmly press and hold the Universal Home Remote button chosen in Step 3 to control the garage door for two seconds and then release it If the garage door does not move press and hold the same button a second time for two seconds and then release it Again if the door does not move press and hold the same button a third time for two seconds and then release The Universal Home Remote should now activate the garage door To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons begin with Step 2 of Programming the Universal Home Remote System Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all previous programming from the Universal Home Remote buttons 2 44 Gate Operator and Canadian Programming If you have questions or need help programming the Universal Home Remote System call 1 800 355 3515 or go to www homelink
299. oading Information Label M AT ON REAR The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX Aaa or M Ibs SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar B pillar With the driver s door open you will find the label attached below the door lock post striker 4 22 The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5 59 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 65 There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification Tire label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axle See Certification Tire Label later in this section Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weig
300. oceeding See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 82 for more information 2 Using the wheel wrench loosen all the wheel nuts by turning the nuts one turn counterclockwise Do not remove them yet 3 Turn the jack adjusting knob clockwise by hand to raise the jack lift head 4 Place the handle extension and wheel wrench onto the jack 5 86 5 Uu C D E Front Position Rear Position A Front Frame C Handle Rear Axle D Extension s B Jack E Wheel Wrench 5 Place the jack in the appropriate position nearest the flat tire ACAUTION Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack ACAUTION Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit 5 87 7 Remove all the wheel nuts and the flat tire CAUTION Continued or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all
301. ode has been matched to this tire and wheel position If you do not hear the confirming single horn chirp you will need to start over with step number one Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 Proceed to the driver side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the driver s side rear tire check to see if the TPMS warning light is still flashing If yes turn the ignition switch to LOCK OFF to exit the sensor matching process If the TPMS warning light is not flashing the five minute time limit has passed and you will need to start the process over beginning with Step 1 Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Put the valve caps back on the valve stems 5 71 Tire Inspection and Rotation We recommend that you regularly inspect your vehicle s tires including the spare tire for signs of wear or damage See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 73 for more information Tires should be rotated every 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle This will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new Any ti
302. of the other modes is selected the compressor will then turn the A C off until it is selected again or the AUTO button is pressed To avoid fogging the inside glass on rainy and humid days at a temperature above freezing press the air conditioning button to run the A C compressor Also it is best to avoid the use of the recirculation mode except when maximum air conditioning performance is needed or for short times to avoid exterior odors 3 21 You may notice a slight change in engine performance when the air conditioning compressor shuts off and turns on again This is normal lt amp Recirculation Press to turn the recirculation mode on or off An indicator light comes on to show that recirculation is on This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle It can be used to help prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle Recirculation mode can be used with vent and bi level modes but it cannot be used with floor defog or defrost modes If recirculation mode is selected with floor defog or defrost modes the indicator flashes three times and turns off to indicate the selection is not available The air conditioning compressor may also run while in recirculation mode This is normal and helps to prevent window fogging If the weather is cold and damp the system may cause the windows to fog while using recirculation mode If the windows do start to fog select defog or defrost
303. omatic Headlamps Turning the control to this position again turns the automatic lighting system back on This feature is not available for vehicles first sold in Canada AUTO Automatic Automatically turns the exterior lamps on and off depending upon how much light is available outside of the vehicle 700 Parking Lamps Turns on the parking lamps together with the following Sidemarker Lamps Taillamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights AD Headlamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the headlamps together with the previously listed lamps and lights 3 13 Headlamps on Reminder A reminder tone sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on if the driver s door is open and the ignition is in LOCK OFF or ACC ACCESSORY To turn the tone off turn the knob all the way counterclockwise In the automatic mode the headlamps turn off once the ignition key is in LOCK OFF Daytime Running Lamps DRL Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL will activate when the following conditions are met The ignition is on The exterior lamps knob is in automatic headlamp mode The light sensor detects daytime light The transmission is not in P Park When DRL are on either the turn signal lamps or h
304. ommand Using the Delete All Name Tags Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system The delete all name tags command deletes all stored responds with Ready followed by a tone phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar 2 Say Dial The system responds with Dial using if present To use the delete all name tags command phone name Number please followed by a tone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system 3 Say the entire number without pausing 2 responds with Ready followed by a tone s Say Delete all name tags The system responds with You are about to delete all name tags stored in your phone directory and your route destination directory Are you sure you want to do this Please say yes or no e Say Yes to delete all name tags Say No to cancel the function and return to the main menu If the system recognizes the number it responds with OK Dialing and dials the number Ifthe system does not recognize the number it confirms the numbers followed by a tone If the number is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Dialing and dials the number If the number is not correct say No The system will ask for the number to be re entered 3 79 Using the Digit Dial Command 1 2 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Digit Dial The system responds wi
305. on about the location of the airbag sensors sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring 1 65 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Safety Belts Now and then check the safety belt reminder light safety belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are all working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job See your dealer retailer to have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3 27 for more information Keep safety belts clean and dry See Care of Safety Belts on page 5 100 1 66 Airbags The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement Make sure the airbag readiness light is working See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 28 for more information Notice f an airbag covering is damaged opened or broken the airbag may not work properly Do not open or break the airbag coverings If there are any opened or broken airbag covers have the airbag covering and or airbag module replaced For the location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 1 57 See your dealer retailer for service Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash
306. on the rear axle After loading the trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper lf they are not adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer Trailering may be limited by the vehicle s ability to carry tongue weight Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating or the RGAWR Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating The effect of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight Consider the following example A vehicle model base weight is 5 500 Ibs 2 495 kg 2 800 Ibs 1 270 kg at the front axle and 2 700 Ibs 1 225 kg at the rear axle It has a GVWR of 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg a RGAWR of 4 000 Ibs 1 814 kg anda GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating of 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg The trailer rating should be GCWR Vehicle Weight Trailer Rating 14 000 Ibs 6350 kg 5 500 Ibs 2495 kg 8 500 Ibs 3855 kg Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer weight 850 Ibs 386 kg and because the weight is applied well behind the rear axle the effect on the rear axle is greater than just the weight itself as much as 1 5 times as much The weight at the rear axle could be 850 Ibs 386 kg X 1 5 1 275 Ibs 578 kg Since the rear axle already weighs 2 700 Ibs 1 225 kg adding 1 275 Ibs 578 kg brings the total to 3 975 Ibs 1 803 kg This is very close to
307. onal keys you will require two current driver s keys You must add a step to the following procedure After Step 2 repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the second current driver s key Then continue with Step 3 To program the new key 1 Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it 2 Insert the current driver s key in the ignition and start the engine If the engine will not start see your dealer retailer for service 3 After the engine has started turn the key to LOCK OFF and remove the key 4 Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON RUN within 10 seconds of removing the previous key 5 The SECURITY light will turn off once the key has been programmed It may not be apparent that the SECURITY light went on due to how quickly the key is programmed 6 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed If you are ever driving and the SECURITY light comes on and stays on you will be able to restart your engine if you turn it off Your PASS Key III system however is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer retailer Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS Key III system at this time If you lose or damage a PASS Key Ill key see your dealer retailer to have a new key made Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In Notice The vehicle does not need an elaborate b
308. onger than 30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons 2 40 2 Hold the end of your hand held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator light in view The hand held transmitter was supplied by the manufacturer of your garage door opener receiver motor head unit Atthe same time press and hold both the Universal Home Remote button to be used to control the garage door and the hand held transmitter button Do not release the Universal Home Remote button or the hand held transmitter button until Step 4 has been completed Some entry gates and garage door openers may require substitution of Step 3 with the procedure noted in Gate Operator and Canadian Programming later in this section The indicator light on the Universal Home Remote will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons Press and hold the newly trained Universal Home Remote button and observe the indicator light lf the indicator light stays on continuously the programming is complete and the garage door should move when the Universal Home Remote button is pressed and released There is no need to continue programming Steps 6 through 8 If the Universal Home Remote indicator light blinks rapidly for tw
309. open the moonroof Press and hold the front of the button to close the moonroof With the moonroof closed press the front of the button to open the moonroof to the vent position The moonroof has a sunshade which can be pulled forward to block sun rays If the sunshade is in the closed position it will open when the moonroof is opened 2 47 42 NOTES 2 48 Section 3 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview 3 4 Electric Power Management 3 17 Hazard Warning Flashers ssesssss 3 6 Battery Run Down Protection 3 18 gn 3 6 Accessory Power Outlet S esses 3 18 Tilt Wheel eee eee pee eee eene 3 6 Climate Controls 2 3 19 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever ee ere ET 3 6 Dual Automatic Climate Control System 3 19 Turn and Lane Change Signals 3 7 Outlet Adjustment eese 3 23 Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 3 7 Rear Climate Control System 3 23 ELE M SEEGER ES KE AES EEED a Climate Controls Personalization 3 24 Ae a Miss Bon 3 9 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 24 Rear Window Wiper Washer lt 2 3 9 Instrument Panel Cluster sssessssse 3 25 CIPUE ND ap Speedometer and Odometer 3 26 Headlamp Washer eses
310. operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected Check the oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer See Engine Oil on page 5 18 PASSENGER DOOR AJAR This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger door is not fully closed Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC 3 48 REAR ACCESS OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in ON RUN Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate and liftglass See Liftgate Liftglass on page 2 12 Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger side rear door is not fully closed Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC SERVICE AIR BAG This message displays if there is a problem with the airbag system Have your dealer retailer inspect the system for problems See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 28 and Airbag System on page 1 52 for more information SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays if a problem occurs with the brake system If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the
311. or high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification Check the tires for wear and if necessary rotate the tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 72 At Least Once a Year Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check ACAUTION Starter Switch Check A CAUTION When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before starting this check be sure there is enough 1 Before starting this check be sure there is enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a room around the vehicle level surface 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake brake See Parking Brake on page 2 27 on page 2 27 Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if turn off the engine immediately if it starts the vehicle begins to move 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The vehicle 3 With the engine off turn the ignition to ON RUN should start only in P Park or N Neutral If the but do not start the engine Without applying the vehicle starts in any other position contact regular brake try to move the shift lever out your dealer retailer for service of P Park with
312. or on or off will be visible See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 29 1 59 The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions The driver airbags and roof rail airbags are not affected by the passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger seat The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or not According to accident statistics children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat i the correct child restraint for their weight and size We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys 1 60 A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child restraint can be serio
313. or quality repairs 7 11 If a Crash Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all right If you are uninjured make sure that no one else in your vehicle or the other vehicle is injured If there has been an injury call emergency services for help Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police officer Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved in the crash Do not discuss your personal condition mental frame of mind or anything unrelated to the crash This will help guard against post crash legal action If you need roadside assistance call Saab Roadside Assistance See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 6 for more information If your vehicle cannot be driven know where the towing service will be taking it Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the driver s name the service s name and the phone number Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your vehicle 7 12 Gather the important information you will need from the other driver Things like name address phone number driver s license number vehicle license plate vehicle make model a
314. ormation Federal Communications Commission FCC and Industry and Science Canada The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies with RSS 210 of Industry and Science Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Tire Pressure Monitor Operation This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle The TPMS is designed to alert the driver if a low tire pressure condition exists Tire pressure levels may also be checked using the Driver Information Cent
315. ortation DOT motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 Occupant Distribution Designated s
316. ot and pull up on the parking brake lever located between the seats To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press in the button at the end of the lever Hold the button in as you move the parking brake lever all the way down If the ignition is on the brake system warning light on the instrument panel cluster will come on See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 31 Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Verify that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill see Towing a Trailer on page 4 29 2 27 Shifting Into Park A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 29 1 Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 2 27 for more information 2 Move the shift lever into P Park by pressing the button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all the way
317. ot fully closed Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC ENGINE COOLANT HOT ENGINE OVERHEATED Notice f you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not increase the engine speed above normal idling speed See Engine Overheating on page 5 34 for more information This message displays and a chime sounds if the cooling system temperature gets hot See Engine Overheating on page 5 34 for the proper course of action This message clears when the coolant temperature drops to a safe operating temperature FRONT FOG LAMPS OFF This message displays if the fog lamps are turned off The message clears after 10 seconds If you turn on the high beam headlamps the fog lamps also turn off and this message appears on the DIC The fog lamps turn back on again when you switch back to low beam headlamps See Fog Lamps on page 3 15 and Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 6 for more information FRONT FOG LAMPS ON This message displays if the fog lamps are turned on The message clears after 10 seconds See Fog Lamps on page 3 15 and Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 6 for more information FUEL LEVEL LOW This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel level i
318. ould void authorization to use this equipment lf there is a decrease in the KE operating range try this Check the distance The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle Stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again Check the transmitter s battery See Battery Replacement later in this section If the transmitter is still not working correctly see your dealer retailer or a qualified technician for service Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter functions work up to 30 feet 9 m away from the vehicle The RKE transmitter buttons do not operate when the key is in the ignition Lock Press to lock all the doors Press again within three seconds and the horn may chirp Unlock Press once to unlock the driver door The parking lamps may flash and the interior lights come on Press il again and all remaining doors unlock To program different feedback settings through the Driver Information Center DIC see Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 42 2 Panic Alarm Press to sound the horn The headlamps and taillamps flash for up to 30 seconds To turn the alarm off press x again or wait 30 seconds or start the vehicle Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle Only RKE transmi
319. ow ACAUTION Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death Never run the engine in an enclosed area that A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park has no fresh air ventilation For more information see Engine Exhaust on page 2 30 Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move See Shifting Into Park on page 2 28 If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 29 2 31 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview mirror with a compass display D On Off Press to turn the dimming feature on or off Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from behind the vehicle The dimming feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates each time t
320. ows how far the vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or kilometers used in Canada The odometer mileage can be checked without the vehicle running Press the trip stem located on the instrument panel cluster If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed the new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the old odometer 3 26 Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero The odometer works together with the Driver Information Center DIC You can set a Trip A and Trip B odometer See Trip Information under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 42 The odometer mileage can be checked without the vehicle running Press the trip stem on the instrument panel cluster Tachometer The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm RPMx1000 Safety Belt Reminders Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light When the engine is started a chime sounds for several seconds to remind the driver to fasten the safety belt unless the driver safety belt is already buckled The driver safety belt light comes on and stays on for several seconds then flashes for several more This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion If the driver s safety belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on Passenger Safety Belt Re
321. p Turn Signal Brown Running Lamps White Ground Light Green Back up Lamps Dark Blue Electric Brakes Red Battery Feed The chassis wiring ring terminal must be fastened to a stud on the underhood electrical center before the trailer feed will become active If towing a light duty trailer with a standard four way round pin connector an adapter connector is available from your dealer retailer If charging a remote non vehicle battery turn on the headlamps to boost the vehicle system voltage and properly charge the battery The vehicle is also equipped with wiring for an electric trailer brake controller These wires are located inside the vehicle on the driver s side under the instrument panel These wires should be connected to an electric trailer brake controller by your dealer retailer or a qualified service center 4 40 The vehicle may be equipped with a four pin trailer towing harness This harness has a four pin trailer connector that contains the following trailer circuits Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal Dark Green Right Stop Turn Signal Brown Running Lamps White Ground This harness also contains the following trailer circuits that are not connected to the four pin trailer connector Light Green Back Up Lamps Dark Blue Electric Brakes Red Battery Feed If the vehicle is a 9 7X Aero a trailer wiring harness extension and instructions for installing this extension were p
322. panel on the driver side It can be seen through the windshield from outside the vehicle The VIN also appears on the Certification Tire and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code This code helps identify the vehicle s engine specifications and replacement parts See Engine Specifications under Capacities and Specifications on page 5 113 for your vehicle s engine code Service Parts Identification Label This label is on the inside of the glove box It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts The label has the following information Vehicle Identification Number VIN Model designation Paint information Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle 5 105 Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment Notice Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle unless you check with your dealer retailer first Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Add on equipment can drain the vehicle battery even if the vehicle is not operating The vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 64 5 106 Headlamps
323. program some features to one setting based on your preference All of the customizable options listed may not be available on your vehicle Only the options available display on the Driver Information Center DIC The default settings for the customization features were set when your vehicle left the factory but may have been changed from their default state since then To change feature preferences make sure the ignition is on and the vehicle is in P Park To avoid excessive drain on the battery it is recommended that the headlamps are turned off Press E to scroll through the available customizable options After pressing EK VEHICLE SETTINGS momentarily displays before going to a customization option Lock Doors Press E until LOCK DOORS IN GEAR appears in the display To select your preference for automatic locking press lt while LOCK DOORS IN GEAR is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt will scroll through the following settings LOCK DOORS IN GEAR default The doors will lock when the vehicle is shifted out of P Park LOCK DOORS WITH SPEED The doors will lock when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph 13 km h for three seconds To select a setting and move on to the next feature press Ef while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 9 for more information 3 51 Unlock Doors Press Ef until UNLOCK DOORS IN PARK appears in the displa
324. ps Turn Signal Sidemarker Stoplamps and Back Up Eamps ies 5 53 Theft Deterrent Radio esses 3 97 Theft Deterrent Systems seesssesssse 2 16 Content Theft Deterrent sssssesssss 2 16 PASS Key III Electronic Immobilizer 2 17 PASS Key III Electronic Immobilizer ODGratiOll cessed arsen rs dentatis 2 18 Hmm db 3 6 TIMES SENG disces dran suene uix ET 3 57 Tire Pressure Wight et eoe eroi eee aree 3 34 WANES cec cents coded AE tee tu REESE SEER ee IE 5 59 Aluminum Wheels Cleaning 5 103 Buying New Tires 2 3 eee rrt rtc 5 74 le ripcq c n 5 80 Changing a Flat Tire 22 rune barrer 5 82 elTe E 5 104 Different Size seerste rarere bek rn uken 5 76 High Speed Operation ssssssssss 5 66 If a Tire Goes Flat sseeessseeeeesese 5 81 Inflation Tire Pressure ssssssss 5 65 Inspection and Rotation ssssessssse 5 72 Tires cont Installing the Spare Tire esses 5 86 Pressure Monitor Operation s 5 69 Pressure Monitor System ssssssss 5 67 Removing the Flat Tire sees 5 86 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 83 Secondary Latch System sssssss 5 91 Spare Tite i iioc cierre tete peior caus 5 97 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
325. ption most AM radio stations boost the power levels during the day and then reduce these levels during the night Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception When this happens try reducing the treble on the radio 3 98 FM Stereo FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Although the radio has a built in electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce interference some static can occur especially around tall buildings or hills causing the sound to fade in and out XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast in the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada Just as with FM tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals causing the sound to fade in and out In addition traveling or standing under heavy foliage bridges garages or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time Cellular Phone Usage Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the vehicle s radio This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls charging the phone s battery or simply having the phone on This interference causes an increased level of static while listening to the radio If static is received while listening to the radio unplug the cellular phone and turn it off Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without bein
326. r rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Recycle it by taking it toa place that collects used oil 5 23 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine air cleaner filter 4 2L L6 Engine shown 5 3L and 6 0L V8 Engines similar When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspect the air cleaner filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace at the first oil change after each 50 000 mile 80 000 km interval See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information If you are driving in dusty dirty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change 5 24 How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter To inspect the air cleaner filter remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust and dirt If the filter remains caked with dirt a new filter is required To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter do the following 1 Remove the screws on the engine air cleaner filter and lift off the cover 2 Remove the air cleaner filter from the housing Care should be taken to dislodge
327. r Remote Positive Terminal To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle All Wheel Drive When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the transfer case you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole Use care not to overtighten the plug What to Use To determine what kind of lubricant to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 12 5 47 Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface 5 48 For all v
328. r Windows and Other Power Options 5 106 Rear Underseat Fuse Block 5 110 Windshield Wiper Fuses eeesssse 5 106 Electronic Immobilizer PASS Key li espansione 2 17 Electronic Immobilizer Operation PASS Key III ccccccccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 2 18 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension IU 4 28 Engine Air Cleaner Filtet 1 renes 5 24 Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp 3 34 endrgem e ge 5 30 Coolant Heater ic estates 2 23 Coolant Temperature Gage ssss 3 33 Drive Belt Routing eeseessessse 6 15 Engine Compartment Overview 5 12 SLM 2 30 Fan NOISO 2 cuiii lie DDR PPERRDU USES NENO 5 36 Oil ace ER e See ER ESKESEN 5 18 Oil Life System teret ae ne Dh 5 22 Overhealing iiit eter RE ramte 5 34 Reduced Power Light 3 39 SIAMING 2 21 Enty Lig hh osusexesestecens tee pravo oa Shore 3 16 Event Data Recorders csceeeeeeeeereeeeeeees 7 16 Exit Te a To esanai aiina D 3 17 Extender Safety Belt sess 1 28 Filter Engine Air Cleaner sese 5 24 Finish Damage cetero then 5 104 Fixed Mast Antenna ee 3 99 Flashers Hazard Warning 0 eceeeeeeeeeeees 3 6 Flash to Pass sedente rrh ener tenet onesies 3 8 Plat ING eios sicud a a dom 5 81
329. r anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint 1 Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 29 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 1 49 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 1 50 If the airbag is off the off indicator in the passenger airbag status ind
330. r s guide for more information Pairing Information Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in vehicle Bluetooth system The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving The in vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links with the first available paired cell phone in the order the phone was paired Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the in vehicle Bluetooth system at a time Pairing should only need to be completed once unless changes to the pairing information have been made or the phone is deleted To link to a different paired phone see Linking to a Different Phone later in this section Pairing a Phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone Say Pair The system responds with instructions and a four digit PIN number The PIN number will be used in Step 4 Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will be paired to the vehicle Reference the cell phone manufacturers user guide for information on this process Locate the device named General Motors in the list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that was provided in Step 3 The system prompts for a name for the phone Use a name that best describes the phone This name will be used to indicate which phone is connected
331. rate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait Saab helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering Courtesy Transportation Dealers may provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes one way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters of the dealer s area Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs and public transportation is used instead of the dealers shuttle service the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by Saab for shuttle service In addition for U S customers should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts See your dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs Courtesy
332. rating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Do not smoke while pumping fuel Do not use a cellular phone while pumping fuel Hood Release 1 To open the hood first pull the handle with this symbol on it It is located inside the vehicle under the instrument panel on the driver s side 2 Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the secondary hood latch up and to the right to release it then lift the hood Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then pull the hood down and close it firmly Check to make sure the hood is closed and repeat the process if necessary Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood on the 4 2L L6 engine here is what you will see FE Ka Tees AGO Nc yi 5 12 Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 24 Engine Coolant Recovery Tank See Cooling System on page 5 29 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 38 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 37 Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick Out of View See Checking the Fluid Level under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5 25 Engine Oil Dipstick See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 Cooling System on page 5
333. rbag Inflate 1 56 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 1 57 How Does an Airbag Restrain 1 57 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 58 Passenger Sensing System 1 59 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 64 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped lie PP ERE 1 65 Restraint System Check ssssssss 1 66 Checking the Restraint Systems 1 66 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash iiie eene e Ee erbe da 1 67 14 Front Seats Power Seats The power seat controls are located on the outboard side of the seat cushions Ell 1 2 Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the horizontal control forward or rearward Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the horizontal control up or down Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the horizontal control up or down Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire horizontal control up or down Use the vertical control to recline the seatback See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 1 5 Power Lumbar Your vehicle has power lumbar on the driver s and front passenger s seats The seatback lumbar support can be adjusted by moving the control located on the outboard side of the seat cushions To increase or decrease support hold the control
334. rbag module Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel For vehicles with roof rail airbags there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows that have occupant seating positions How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually Roof rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body 1 57 Rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first and second rows The rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events although no system can prevent all such ejections But airbags would not help in many types of collisions primarily because the occupant s motion is not toward those airbags See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 1 56 for more information Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts What Will You See After
335. rd passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows A CAUTION If something is between an occupant and an airbag the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating airoag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down through any door or window opening If you do the path of an inflating roof rail airbag will be blocked 1 55 When Should an Airbag Inflate Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver s or right front passenger s head and chest However they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example e If the vehic
336. re Information for these features is on the pages following Turn and Lane Change Signals An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or E lane change Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change Hold it there until the lane change is complete The lever returns to its starting position when it is released If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrows flash rapidly or do not come on a signal bulb could be burned out Have the bulbs replaced If the bulb is not burned out check the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 107 If the vehicle has a trailer towing option with added wiring for the trailer lamps a turn signal flasher is used With this flasher installed the signal indicator flashes even if a turn signal bulb is burned out Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they are working Turn Signal On Chime A chime sounds if the turn signal has been on 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km Move the turn signal lever to off Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low to high beam push the lever toward the instrument panel To return to low beam headlamps pull the multifunction lever toward you Then release it When the high beams are on this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on Flash to Pass Th
337. re that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place Stereo RCA Jacks The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system Standard RCA cables not included are needed to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks The yellow connector inputs video and the red and white connectors input right and left audio Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for proper connection of the auxiliary device 3 85 To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system connect an external auxiliary device to the color coded RCA jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the RSE system power on If the RSE system had been previously in the DVD player mode pressing the SRCE button on the faceplate or the remote control will switch the RSE system between the auxiliary device and the DVD player How to Change the Video Format when in the Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC In some countries the video format may be in the PAL system To change the video format 1 Press the display menu button 2 Press the down arrow button to highlight the Video Form
338. reak in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not drive at any one constant speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not make full throttle starts Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Do not tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer on page 4 29 for the trailer towing capabilities of the vehicle and more information Following break in engine speed and load can be gradually increased Ignition Positions The ignition switch is located on the center console and has four different positions In order to shift out of P Park turn the ignition to ON RUN and apply the brake pedal Notice Using a tool to force the key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key Use the correct key make sure it is all the way in and turn it only with your hand If the key cannot be turned by hand see your dealer retailer Q LOCK OFF This position locks the ignition and transmission The key can only be removed when the ignition switch is in LOCK OFF and the vehicle has
339. red After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu 3 78 Using the Directory Command The directory command lists all of the name tags stored by the system To use the directory command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Directory The system responds with Directory and then plays back all of the stored name tags When the list is complete the system returns to the main menu Deleting Name Tags The system uses the following commands to delete name tags Delete Delete all name tags Using the Delete Command The delete command allows specific name tags to be deleted To use the delete command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Delete The system responds with Delete please say the name tag followed by a tone 3 Say the name tag to be deleted The system responds with Would you like to delete lt name tag gt Please say yes or no Making a Call Calls can be made using the following commands e Ifthe name tag is correct say Yes to delete Dial the name tag The system responds with OK Digit Dial deleting name tag returning to the main menu e Call e fth tag is incorrect say No The system i the name tag y y e Re dial responds with No OK let s try again please say the name tag Using the Dial C
340. responds with About to store name tag Does that sound OK f the name tag does not sound correct say No and repeat Step 5 f the name tag sounds correct say Yes and the name tag is stored After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu Using the Digit Store Command The digit store command allows a phone number to be stored by entering the digits individually 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Digit Store The system responds with Please say the first digit to store followed by a tone 3 77 3 Say the first digit to be stored The system will repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone Continue entering digits until the number to be stored is complete f an unwanted number is recognized by the system say Clear at any time to clear the last number To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system say Verify at any time and the system will repeat them 4 After the complete number has been entered say Store The system responds with Please say the name tag followed by a tone 5 Say a name tag for the phone number The name tag is recorded and the system responds with About to store lt name tag gt Does that sound OK e If the name tag does not sound correct say No and repeat Step 5 e If the name tag sounds correct say Yes and the name tag is sto
341. restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 46 If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 38 1 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 5 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 If the child restraint has a top teth
342. rk knock If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking the engine needs service Gasoline Specifications At a minimum gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN CGSB 3 5 or 3 511 in Canada Some gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT See Additives on page 5 6 for additional information California Fuel If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications See the underhood emission control label If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards the vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance might be affected The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 34 If this occurs return to your authorized dealer retailer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent engine an
343. rning Light The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when you are starting the engine This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel To turn it off add fuel to the fuel tank See Fuel on page 5 5 Check Gas Cap Light If your vehicle has this light it will come on if your gas cap is not securely fastened See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 34 for more information 3 41 Driver Information Center DIC The Driver Information Center DIC display is located on the instrument panel cluster below the speedometer The DIC buttons are located on the center of the instrument panel above the radio The DIC can display information such as the trip odometer fuel economy customization features and warning status messages Bl Cad Je A Fuel Information Press this button to display the fuel range fuel used average fuel economy and engine oil life See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 42 for more information ZX Trip Information Press this button to display the odometer trip odometers tire pressure and timer See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 42 for more information 3 42 A Hazard Press this button to turn the hazard warning flashers on and off See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 for more information En Customization Press this button to access the vehicle settings menu and customize the personal settings on your vehicle See DIC Vehic
344. rogrammable Unlocking Feature The following is the list of available programming options Mode 1 Driver s door unlocks when the transmission is shifted into P Park Mode 2 All doors unlock when the transmission is shifted into P Park Mode 3 All doors unlock when the key is removed from the ignition Mode 4 No automatic door unlock The automatic door locks were pre programmed at the factory to unlock all doors once the transmission is shifted to P Park The following instructions detail how to program your door locks differently than the factory setting Choose one of the four programming options listed previously before entering the program mode To enter the program mode you need to do the following 1 Begin with the ignition off Then pull the turn signal multifunction lever toward you and hold it there while you perform the next step 2 Turn the key to ON RUN and LOCK OFF twice Then with the key in LOCK OFF release the turn signal multifunction lever Once you do this you will hear the lock switch lock and unlock the horn will chirp twice and a 30 second program timer will begin 3 You are now ready to program the automatic door locks Select one of the four programming options listed above and press the unlock side of the power door lock switch to cycle through the unlocking options You will have 30 seconds to begin programming If you exceed the 30 second limit the locks will automatically lock
345. rovided when the vehicle was delivered This extension will allow the vehicle s trailer wiring harness to be more easily accessible There is a four way connector on the harness A seven way adapter plug is also included if the trailer requires it Section 5 Service and Appearance Care SEVICE e a EEEE 5 3 Accessories and Modifications 5 3 California Proposition 65 Warning 5 8 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 5 3 Doing Your Own Service Work 5 4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the bue c 5 5 gem 5 5 Gasoline Octane ssee 5 5 Gasoline Specifications ssssssss 5 5 California Fuel eee 5 6 porem E 5 6 Fuels in Foreign Countries ssssusssse 5 7 Filling the Tank otn 5 8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 5 10 Checking Things Under the Hood 5 10 Hood Release eese 5 11 Engine Compartment Overview 5 12 Engine Oil Er 5 18 Engine Oil Life System esses 5 22 Engine Air Cleaner Filter esses 5 24 Automatic Transmission Fluid 5 25 Cooling System sss 5 29 Engine Coolant sseeeenne 5 30 Radiator Pressure Cap sse 5 34 Engine Overheating seseee
346. rson at a time 1 30 A CAUTION Never do this Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury The child might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle ACAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Every ti
347. ry transmitter a second time If the key is inserted in the ignition this feature will not lock the doors See Lockout Protection on page 2 11 You can turn the delayed locking feature on or off If the feature is turned off the doors will lock immediately when a power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter lock button is pressed Programming Delayed Locking To turn the delayed locking feature on or off do the following 1 Press and hold the power door lock switch on the driver s door in the lock position 2 Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock button twice If the delayed locking feature was on it will now be off If the feature was off it will now be on Programmable Automatic Door Locks Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock unlock feature which enables you to program your vehicle s power door locks You can program this feature through the Driver Information Center DIC or by the following method See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 51 Programmable Locking Feature Following are the two locking modes that can be programmed Mode 1 All doors lock when the transmission is shifted out of P Park Mode 2 All doors lock when the vehicle speed is greater than 8 mph 13 km h The automatic door locks were pre programmed at the factory to lock all the doors when the transmission is shifted into gear The following instructions detail how to program your door lock
348. s The radio only scans preset stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band 3 60 1 Information XM Satellite Radio Service and MP3 Features If the current station has a message the information symbol displays Press this button to see the message The message can display the artist song title call in phone numbers etc If the entire message is not displayed parts of the message appears every three seconds To scroll through the message press and release the information button A new group of words display after every press of this button Once the complete message displays the information symbol disappears until another new message is received The last message can be displayed by pressing the information button The last message can be viewed until a new message is received or a different station is tuned to When a message is not available from a station No Info displays 1 6 Preset Pushbuttons Radio with Six Disc CD Player Press this button to play stations that are programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons The radio only seeks preset stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band Setting Preset Stations Up to 30 stations six FM1 six FM2 and six AM six XM1 and six XM2 can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons To program stations 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press BAND to select FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press AUTO EQ
349. s differently than the factory setting Choose one of the two programming options listed previously before entering the program mode To enter the program mode do the following 1 Begin with the ignition off Then pull the turn signal multifunction lever toward you and hold it there while you perform the next step 2 Turn the key to ON RUN and LOCK OFF twice Then with the key in LOCK OFF release the turn signal multifunction lever Once you do this you will hear the lock switch lock and unlock the horn will chirp twice and a 30 second program timer will begin 3 You are now ready to program the automatic door locks Select one of the two programming options listed previously and press the lock side of the power door lock switch to cycle through the lock options You will have 30 seconds to begin programming If you exceed the 30 second limit the locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have left the program mode If this occurs repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1 to re enter the programming mode You can exit the program mode any time by turning the ignition to ON RUN The locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you are leaving the program mode If the lock unlock switches are not pressed while in the programming mode the current auto lock unlock setting will not be modified See your dealer for more information P
350. s low Refuel as soon as possible See Low Fuel Warning Light on page 3 41 Filling the Tank on page 5 8 and Fuel on page 5 5 for more information ICE POSSIBLE This message may display if the outside temperature reaches a level where ice could form on the roadway Adjust your driving accordingly If the temperature rises to a safe level the message clears This message clears itself after 10 seconds or you can manually clear it from the DIC display KEY FOB BATTERY LOW This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter battery is low Replace the battery in the transmitter See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver side rear door is not fully closed Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC 3 47 OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low severe engine damage may occur If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected See Engine Oil on page 5 18 for more information This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not
351. s overheating both fans should be running If they are not do not continue to run the engine and have the vehicle serviced Notice Engine damage from running the engine without coolant is not covered by the warranty Notice If the engine catches fire because of being driven with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment ZN CAUTION Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool 5 35 If No Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam can be seen or heard the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle e Climbs a long hill on a hot day Stops after high speed driving e Idles for long periods in traffic Tows atrailer If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam 1 Turn the air conditioning off 2 Turn the heater o
352. s the chest A The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 20 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury You might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest hb SAY N A SET J g AS AT mn p A The belt is behind the body 1 21 Q What is wrong with this A5 CAUTION You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer retailer to fix it i a d The belt is twisted across the body 1 22 Lap Shoulder Belt All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap shoulder belt The following instructions explain how to wear a lap shoulder belt properly 1 2 Adjust the seat if the seat is adjustable so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index Pick up the latch plate and pull th
353. se a power door lock switch with the door open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident f you do not want to activate the theft deterrent System the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote keyless entry transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm If you set off the alarm by accident unlock any door with the key You can also turn off the alarm by pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter The alarm will not stop if you try to unlock a door any other way Testing the Alarm The alarm can be tested by following these steps 1 From inside the vehicle lower the driver s window and open the driver s door 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the security light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm When the alarm is set the power door unlock switch is not operational If the alarm does not sound when it should but the headlamps flash check to see if the horn works
354. se the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked So wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever The manual lever on each door works only that you drive door s lock Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening Power Door Locks The power door lock switches are located on the driver s and front passenger s door armrests Press the lock symbol to lock all of the doors To unlock the doors press the other side of the switch Delayed Locking This feature delays the locking of the doors and the liftgate when using the power lock or the remote keyless entry system The first press of the power door lock switch or lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter with the driver s door open will activate the delay locking A chime will sound All doors and the liftgate can be reopened for up to five seconds from the time the last door is closed Five seconds after the last door is closed all the doors will lock You can lock the doors immediately by using the power door lock switch or by pressing the lock button on the optional remote keyless ent
355. seat To find out how see Shifting Into Park on page 2 28 When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of P Park before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of P Park Shifting Out of Park The vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system The shift lock release is designed to Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in P Park with the shift lever button fully released and Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P Park unless the ignition is in ON RUN and the regular brake pedal is applied The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage less than 9 volt battery If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage try charging or jump starting the battery See Jump Starting on page 5 43 for more information To shift out of P Park use the following 1 Apply the brake pedal 2 Press the shift lever button 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you still are unable to shift out of P Park 1 Fully release the shift lever button 2 Hold the brake pedal down and press the shift lever button again 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you still cannot move the shift lever from P P
356. seat cushion 1 41 The labels are located above a flap at the base of the seatback in the rear outside seating positions The anchors are located under the flap In order to get to the anchors you will need to pull the strap at the center of the seat where the seat cushion meets the seatback This will allow you to fold the seat cushion up and out of the way Lift the flap to expose the anchors and then lower the seat cushion Be sure the cushion is locked into place The top tether anchors for each rear seating position are located on the floor in the cargo area of your vehicle Do not use the rear tie down brackets near the liftgate for top tethers Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed 1 42 Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 38 for additional information Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System ACAUTION If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to anchors the child restraint w
357. senger s windows Press down the top of the switch to lower the window and pull up on the switch to raise the window If you hold the switch down for three to seven seconds after the window has been completely lowered or raised the window will not operate for about 15 seconds Express Down Window AUTO Express down The driver s and front passenger s window switches have an express down feature that allows you to lower the window without holding the switch down Press down briefly on the driver s or front passenger s window switch labeled AUTO to activate the express down feature Lightly tap the switch to open the window slightly The express down feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the top of the switch Window Lockout Lockout Your vehicle has a lockout feature to prevent passengers from operating the power windows The lockout switch is located in front of the window switches on the driver s door A light in the lockout switch will come on to show that the switch has been activated Press the lockout switch again to return to normal operation Sun Visors Sun Visors with Slide Rod Your vehicle may have this feature Pull the sun visor down to block glare Detach the sun visor from the center mount and slide it along the rod from side to side to cover the driver or passenger side of the front window Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the side window It can also be moved along the rod from side to si
358. senger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non GM covers upholstery or trim or with GM covers upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle Any object such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device installed under or on top of the seat fabric could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag s or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag s See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 59 If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 If your vehicle has rollover roof rail airbags see Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5 76 for additional important information Because I have a disability have to get my vehicle modified How can I find out whether this will affect my airbag system If you have questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 In addition your dealer retailer and the service manual have informati
359. sesees 5 34 Engine Fan Noise cceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 36 Power Steering Fluid eeseeseessssss 5 37 Windshield Washer Fluid esses 5 38 ICL cre Em 5 39 Battery qom m rt 5 42 Jump Starting iicet rete eere tenen redes 5 43 All Wheel Drive sesssemm 5 47 Rear Axle suut el eal 5 48 Front Axle ooi eee ein teens 5 49 Headlamp Aiming sse 5 50 Bulb Replacement suseessueessses 5 50 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 5 50 Halogen Bulbs 2 2 traitent ette 5 51 Headlamps reote dresden Rene nets 5 51 Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking Eamps ioi pier diei 5 53 Taillamps Turn Signal Sidemarker Stoplamps and Back up Lamps 5 53 License Plate Lamp esses 5 55 Replacement Bulbs eeeesesessse 5 55 Windshield Replacement 5 56 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 5 56 5 1 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care DILE 5 59 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Tire Sidewall Labeling esses 5 60 SUMACES E per aeaii 5 100 Tire Terminology and Definitions 5 62 Care of Safety Belts sessesssssss 5 100 Inflation Tire Pressure esses 5 65 Weatherstrips eese 5 100
360. setting decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing toward the driver This knob can also adjust the passenger side temperature setting if the two are linked Passenger Side Temperature Knob Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle The display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing toward the passenger The passenger temperature setting can be set to match and link to the driver s temperature setting by pressing and holding the AUTO button for three seconds When adjusting the driver side temperature setting the passenger side temperature setting will follow and both arrows will appear on the display The passenger side temperature setting also resets and re links to the driver side temperature setting if the vehicle has been off for more than three hours ABV Fan Control Press the arrows to increase or decrease the fan speed The display shows the selected fan speed and the driver side temperature setting for five seconds D Air Delivery Mode Control Press to change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle The air delivery modes will appear on the display as it is being adjusted The display shows the selected air delivery mode and the driver temperature setting for five seconds To change the current air delivery mode select one of the following A Vent Air is directed to the instrument panel out
361. socket end of the extension into the hoist shaft hole on a 45 degree angle downward 12 Be sure that the socket end of the extension connects to the hoist shaft Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest of the way 13 Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening Pull the tire out from under the vehicle Notice f you drive away before the spare tire or secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled you could damage your vehicle Always reinstall this cable before driving your vehicle 14 Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can You will not be able to store a spare tire using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced 5 93 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire from your vehicle If this happened when your vehicle was being driven the tire might contact a Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place person or another vehicle causing injury and of course damage to itself as well Be sure the underbody mounted spare tire is stored with its valve stem pointing up Notice An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should always be stored under the vehicle with the
362. ssistance for Text Telephone TTY Users usus 7 6 Customer Assistance Offices 7 6 Roadside Assistance Program 7 6 Scheduling Service Appointments 7 8 Courtesy Transportation 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 7 Collision Damage Repair esesessssse 7 10 Customer Assistance Information Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Reporting Safety Defects to Saab Service Publications Ordering Information Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Event Data Recorders OnStar Navigation System Radio Frequency Identification RFID Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Saab Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by the dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts
363. stem in automatic mode 1 Press AUTO When AUTO is selected the air conditioning and air inlet are automatically controlled The air conditioning compressor will run continuously when the outside temperature is over approximately 40 F 4 C The air inlet will normally be set to outside air If it is hot outside the air inlet automatically changes to recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down the vehicle 2 Set the driver s and passenger s temperature To find your comfort setting start with a 72 F 22 C temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to adjust Turn the driver or passenger side temperature knob to adjust the temperature setting as necessary If a temperature setting of 60 F 15 C is chosen the system will remain at the maximum cooling setting If a temperature setting of 90 F 32 C is chosen the system remains at the maximum heat setting Choosing either maximum setting may not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster 3 20 Manual Operation Q Off Press to turn off the entire climate control system Outside air still enters the vehicle and will be directed to the floor The system turns on by pressing either AUTO air delivery mode fan control or by adjusting either temperature knob Driver s Side Temperature Knob Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature on the driver side of the vehicle The display will show the temperature
364. stomization Button En Customization Press this button to access the VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customize the settings to your vehicle See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 51 for more information Select Button lt a Select Press the select button to reset certain DIC functions turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC display and set your customization settings For example this button will allow you to reset the trip odometers turn off the FUEL LEVEL LOW message and enables you to scroll through and select the language in which the DIC information will appear DIC Warnings and Messages Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed to correct the condition Multiple messages may appear one after another Some messages may not require immediate action Press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the messages and to clear them from the display Some messages cannot be cleared from the display because they are more urgent These messages require action before they can be removed from the DIC display Take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear not correct the problem The following are the possible messages that can be displayed an
365. sure Monitor Operation on page 5 69 for more information If the warning comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the TPMS See your dealer retailer STABILITRAK ACTIVE This message displays anytime the StabiliTrak system activates to maintain vehicle stability Any combination of engine speed management brake traction control and stability control displays this message STABILITRAK NOT READY This message may display if driving conditions delay StabiliTrak system initialization This is normal Once the system initializes this message will no longer be displayed on the DIC 3 49 STABILITRAK OFF This message displays when you press the StabiliTrak button for more than five seconds or when stability control has been automatically disabled The StabiliTrak button is located on the transmission shift handle To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system you should normally leave StabiliTrak on However you should turn StabiliTrak off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it or if you are driving in extreme off road conditions and require more wheel spin See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 20 To turn the StabiliTrak system back on press the StabiliTrak button again The message may display if the brake system warning light is on See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 31
366. system It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally the oil must be changed at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since the last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Whenever the oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on reset the system To reset the Engine Oil Life System 1 Use the fuel button on the Driver Information Center to reach the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen 2 Press and hold the select button on the Driver Information Center five seconds while ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed 3 OIL LIFE RESET will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC display for 10 seconds to let you know the system is reset If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on when the vehicle is started the engine oil life system has not reset Repeat the procedure What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing o
367. t the pedals is located on the steering column E Press the switch forward or backward to move the pedals closer or farther away from you Engine Coolant Heater The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up in cold weather conditions at or below 0 F 18 C Vehicles with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at least four hours before starting the vehicle An internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above 0 F 18 C To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is located on the driver side of the engine compartment next to the battery box facing the engine 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet A CAUTION Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts and prevent damage The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors
368. t full deployment Your vehicle has roof rail airbags See Airbag System on page 1 52 Roof rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes In addition these roof rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover Roof rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design Roof rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal impacts near frontal impacts or rear impacts Both roof rail airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over In any particular crash no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbags inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down For roof rail airbags deployment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact In a rollover event roof rail airbag deployment is determined by the direction of the roll What Makes an Airbag Inflate In a deployment event the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy The inflator the airbag and related hardware are all part of the ai
369. t record information about the vehicle s performance and how it is driven For example your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crash and if so equipped to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle These modules may store data to help your dealer technician service your vehicle Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed These modules may also retain the owner s personal preferences such as radio pre sets seat positions and temperature settings Event Data Recorders This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal How fast the vehicle was traveling This data can help provide a bett
370. t the vehicle is overloaded When the overload protection mode is on it will not allow damage to the air compressor However do not overload the vehicle See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 If the suspension remains at a low height the rear axle load has exceeded GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating When the overload protection mode is activated the compressor operates for about 30 seconds to one minute without raising the vehicle depending on the amount of overload This will continue each time the ignition is turned on until the rear axle load is reduced below GAWR Towing a Trailer A CAUTION The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all The driver and passengers could be seriously injured The vehicle may also be damaged the resulting repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed Ask your dealer retailer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle Notice Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this section and see your dealer retailer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle To identify the tr
371. t tow an all wheel drive vehicle with any of its wheels on the ground Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System With this feature an electronically controlled air suspension system automatically keeps the vehicle level as it is loaded and unloaded The system includes a compressor two height sensors and two air springs supporting the rear axle 4 28 The system also has an internal clock to prevent overheating if the inflator is used for prolonged periods If the system overheats all leveling function stops until the system cools down During this time the indicator light on the air inflator switch will be flashing The ignition has to be on for the system to inflate in order to raise the vehicle to the standard ride height after loading The system can lower the vehicle to the standard ride height after unloading with the ignition on and also for up to 30 minutes after the ignition has been turned off The compressor may be heard while it is operating when the vehicle is being loaded and periodically as the system adjusts the vehicle to the standard ride height If the vehicle is parked for an extended period of time some bleed down of the suspension is normal Upon starting the vehicle proper height will be achieved Overload Protection The air suspension system is equipped with overload protection Overload protection is designed to protect the air suspension system and it is an indicator to the driver tha
372. tance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law 5 78 A WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other the alignment might need to be checked If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced See your dealer retailer for proper diagnosis Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel
373. ternator may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on such as headlamps high beams fog lamps rear window defogger climate control fan at high speed heated seats engine cooling fans trailer loads and loads plugged into accessory power outlets EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery It does this by balancing the generator s output and the vehicle s electrical needs It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power whenever needed It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories Normally these actions occur in steps or levels without being noticeable In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action this action may be noticeable to the driver If so a Driver Information Center DIC message might be displayed such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW or LOW BATTERY If this message is displayed it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 45 3 17 Battery Run Down Protection This feature shuts off the dome courtesy and vanity lamps if they are left on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition is off This helps to keep the battery from running down If the battery run down protection shuts off the interior lamps it may be necessary to do on
374. tes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1804 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 www dr bbb org goauto This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors Saab reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or to discontinue its participation in this program STEP THREE Canadian Owners In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two General Motors of Canada Limited on behalf of Saab Automobile A B wants you to be aware of its participation in a no charge Mediation Arbitration Program General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory related vehicle service claims The program pro
375. th Digit dial using lt phone name gt please say the first digit to dial followed by a tone Say the digit to be dialed one at a time Following each digit the system will repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone Continue entering digits until the number to be dialed is complete After the whole number has been entered say Dial The system responds with OK Dialing and dials the number f an unwanted number is recognized by the system say Clear at any time to clear the last number To hear all of the numbers recognized by the System say Verify at any time and the system will repeat them Using the Call Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Call The system responds with Call using phone name Please say the name tag followed by a tone 3 80 3 Say the name tag of the person to call f the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with OK calling name tag gt and dials the number f the system is unsure it recognizes the right name tag it confirms the name tag followed by a tone If the name tag is correct say Yes The system responds with OK calling name tag gt and dials the number If the name tag is not correct say No The system will ask for the name tag to be re entered Once connected the person called will be heard through the audio speakers Using the
376. that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle A CAUTION Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 82 for more information 5 79 Used Replacement Wheels A CAUTION Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangero
377. the front outboard occupants Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen they are part of the safety belt assembly They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met And if your vehicle has side impact airbags safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event Pretensioners work only once If the pretensioners activate in a crash they will need to be replaced and probably other new parts for the vehicle s safety belt system See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1 67 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat Here is how to install the comfort guide to the shoulder belt 1 Slide the guide off of its storage clip located between the interior body and the seatback or from the storage pocket on the side of the seat 2 Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide 1 25 A CAUTION A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in
378. the environment All recommended maintenance is important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from the vehicle To help protect the environment and to keep the vehicle in good condition be sure to maintain the vehicle properly 6 2 Using the Maintenance Schedule We want to help keep this vehicle in good working condition But we do not know exactly how you will drive it You might drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you might drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You might use the vehicle in making deliveries Or you might drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You might need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition see your dealer retailer This schedule is for vehicles that carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits use the recommended fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 should be performed when indicated See Additional
379. the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 82 8 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel ZN CAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When changing a wheel remove any rust CAUTION Continued 5 88 9 Place the spare tire on the wheel mounting surface ACAUTION Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose The vehicle s wheel could fall off causing a crash 10 Put the nuts on by hand Make sure the cone shaped end is toward the wheel 11 Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub If a nut cannot be turned by hand use the e wrench and see your dealer 12 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle aS Soon as BOSSIDIE counterclockwise Lower the jack completely 5 89 Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid A CAUTION expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel torque specification See Capacities and Specifications on page 5 113 for the wheel nut torque specification nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you
380. the sides Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments often Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different A CAUTION than driving on flat or rolling terrain Tips for driving in these conditions include Coasting downhill in N Neutral or with the ignition Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape off is dangerous The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill Going down steep or long hills shift to a You could crash Always have the engine running lower gear and the vehicle in gear when going downhill Check all fluid levels and brakes tires cooling System and transmission AN CAUTION Stay in your own lane Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds i hat I i 2 If you do not shift down the brakes could get so slag die SI YOUEN vane Top of hills Be alert something could be in your lane stalled car accident hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let the engine Pay attention to special road signs falling rocks assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope area winding roads long grades passing or no passing zones and take appropriate action Winter Driving Driving on Snow or Ice Drive c
381. the tire s air pressure When increasing the tire s pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the tire s sidewall To decrease air pressure out of a tire you can use the pointed end of the valve cap a pencil style air pressure gage or a key You have two minutes to match the first tire wheel position and five minutes overall to match all four tire wheel positions If it takes longer than two minutes to match the first tire and wheel or more than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching process stops and you will need to start over The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below 1 Set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON RUN with the engine off 3 Turn the headlamp control from off to parking lamps four times within three seconds A double horn chirp will sound and the TPMS low tire warning light will begin to flash The double horn chirp and flashing TPMS warning light indicate that the TPMS matching process has started The TPMS warning light should continue flashing throughout the matching procedure 4 Start with the driver side front tire 5 Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure for 10 seconds then stop and listen for a single horn chirp 10 11 The single horn chirp should sound within 15 seconds confirming that the sensor identification c
382. the vehicle even when no child is in it Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in acrash This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a LATCH compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual When installing a child restraint with a top tether you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint A child restraint must never be installed using only the top tether and anchor In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments 1 39 Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Lower anchors A are metal bars built into the vehicle A top tether A C anchors the top of the child
383. tion f the high beam headlamps are turned on the fog lamps will turn off They will turn back on again when you switch back to low beam headlamps When the Fog Lamps are turned on or off a message will appear on the Driver Information Center See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 45 Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps 3 15 Instrument Panel Brightness Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the interior lights To turn on the dome lamps turn the knob completely clockwise as far as it will go The dome lamps stay on until they are turned off Dome Lamps The dome lamps automatically come on when a door is opened unless the dome lamp override button is pressed in The lamps can also be turned on and off by turning the instrument panel brightness control clockwise to the farthest position Dome Lamp Override The dome lamp override button is located to the left of the steering column on the instrument panel p Press to turn the dome lamps off The dome lamps will remain off when a door is open This overrides the illuminated entry feature unless the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle To return the lamps to automatic operation press p again The dome lamps will come on when any door is opened Entry Lighting The vehicle has entry lighting When any door is opened the dome lamps come on as lon
384. topics See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information This feature is only available in the continental U S OnStar Steering Wheel Controls This vehicle may have a Talk Mute button that can be used to interact with OnStar Hands Free Calling See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 97 for more information On some vehicles the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems or to dial phone extensions See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information How OnStar Service Works The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle information This information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed the emergency button is pressed or if the airbags or AACN system deploy This information usually includes the vehicles GPS location and in the event of a crash additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle was involved in e g the direction from which the vehicle was hit When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling is used the vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicles GPS location so they can provide services where it is located OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area OnStar service also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area has coverage network capacity an
385. tow a tire from to the storage position under the vehicle while it is supported by a jack you could damage the tire and or your vehicle Always remove or restow a tire when the vehicle is on the ground 1 Open the liftgate See Liftgate Liftglass on page 2 12 for more information 2 Attach the wheel wrench A to the extension C 5 84 3 Insert the socket end of the extension C on a 45 degree angle downward into the hoist drive shaft hole It is exposed when the rear gate is open and is just above the rear bumper Be sure the socket end of the extension C connects to the hoist shaft B 4 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire Keep turning the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle If the spare tire does not lower to the ground the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower See Secondary Latch System on page 5 91 for more information 5 Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable when the tire has been completely lowered and pull it through the wheel opening 6 Pull the tire out from under the vehicle Notice f you drive away before the spare tire or secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled you could damage your vehicle Always reinstall this cable before driving your vehicle 7 Put the spare tire near the flat tire 5 85 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1 Do a safety check before pr
386. tters programmed to the vehicle will work If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer retailer When the replacement transmitter is programmed to the vehicle all remaining transmitters must also be programmed Any lost or stolen transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed Each vehicle can have up to four transmitters programmed to it Battery Replacement Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATTERY LOW message displays in the DIC See KEY FOB BATTERY LOW under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 45 Notice When replacing the battery do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter Static from your body could damage the transmitter To replace the battery 1 Remove the screw from the back of the RKE cover to open the transmitter 2 Remove the old battery Do not use a metal object 3 Insert the new battery Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery 4 Assemble the transmitter and replace the screw Doors and Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle From the outside use the remote keyless entry transmitter or the key Door Locks From the inside slide the manual lever forward or rearward ACAUTION Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it You increa
387. two headlamp retaining clips to release 4 Remove the bulb cover for the high beam A and the headlamp assembly from the vehicle low beam B bulbs 5 Remove the bulb socket that needs to be replaced by turning it counterclockwise 6 Disconnect the electrical connector from the old bulb 5 52 Plug the electrical connector into the new bulb using care not to touch the glass with your fingers Turn the new bulb clockwise to install it in the socket Reinstall the bulb covers Push the headlamp assembly back into place in the vehicle Press down on the retaining clips to secure the headlamp assembly Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking Lamps To replace one of these bulbs 1 Follow Steps 1 through 3 under Headlamps on page 5 51 to access the front turn signal sidemarker or parking lamp Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the lamp assembly Holding the socket pull the old bulb to release it from the socket 4 Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks Insert the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and turn it clockwise to secure Reinstall the headlamp assembly by lining up the headlamp assembly with the slots in the headlamp retaining clips Press down on the headlamp retaining clips to secure the headlamp assembly Taillamps Turn Signal Sidemarker Stoplamps and Back up Lamps A Back up Lamp B Turn Signal Lamp C Stoplamp Ta
388. udio source 3 94 DVD Display Error Messages The following errors may be displayed on the video screen Disc Format Error This message will be displayed if a disc is inserted upside down if the disc is not readable or if the format is not compatible with the DVD player Load Eject Error This message will be displayed if the disc is not properly loaded or ejected Disc Play Error This message will be displayed if the DVD player cannot play the disc Scratched or damaged discs will cause this error Region Code Error This message will be displayed if the region code of the DVD is not compatible with the region code of the DVD player No Disc This message will be displayed if any of the buttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control are pressed and no disc is present in the DVD player DVD Distortion There may be an experience with audio distortion in the wireless headphones when operating cellular phones scanners CB radios Global Positioning Systems GPS two way radios mobile fax or walkie talkies It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle Excludes the OnStar System Cleaning the Video Screen Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth and gently wipe the video screen Do not spray directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or too long on the video screen Rear Seat Audio RSA This feature allows rear s
389. uick reference Litho in U S A Part No 25820782 B Second Printing Canadian Owners A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer retailer or from Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 1 800 551 4123 helminc com Propri taires Canadiens On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en fran ais aupr s de concessionnaire ou l adresse suivante Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 1 800 551 4123 helminc com Index To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the Index in the back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found 92008 General Motors Corporation All Rights Reserved Safety Warnings and Symbols A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means Do Not Do not do this or Do not let this happen A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the warning ACAUTION These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid or reduce the hazard Read these cautions A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle Notice These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty and it could be costly The notice tells what
390. unning at high speed Notice Shifting out of P Park or N Neutral with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle D Drive This position is for normal driving It provides the best fuel economy If you need more power for passing and you are Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down The vehicle will shift down to the next gear and have more power 2 25 Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding see Skidding under Loss of Control on page 4 12 D Drive can be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving You may want to shift the transmission to 3 Third or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often 3 Third This position is also used for normal driving It reduces vehicle speed more than D Drive without using the brakes You might choose 3 Third instead of D Drive when driving on hilly winding roads when towing a trailer so there is less shifting between gears and when going down a steep hill To shift to the 3 Third position you must first press the large button on the shift handle While the button
391. ur driving conditions Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil change To reset the engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on page 5 22 In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Engine Oil on page 5 18 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 3 43 Trip Information Button ZX Trip Information Press this button to scroll through the odometer trip odometers tire pressures and timer Odometer Press the trip information button until ODOMETER appears on the display This mode shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles or kilometers Pressing the trip stem located on the instrument panel cluster with the vehicle off will also display the odometer Trip A Press the trip information button until TRIP A appears on the display This mode shows the current distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in either miles or kilometers Trip B Press the trip information button until TRIP B appears on the display This mode shows the current distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in either miles or kilometers To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information press and hold the select button for one second while in one of the trip modes This will reset the information for TRIP A or TRIP B 3 44 You can also reset the TRIP A or TRIP B while they are displayed by pr
392. ur side of the lane Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass Doing so can reduce your visibility Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle When you are being passed ease to the right Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid the wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin lf the vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough the vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the ro
393. urther adjustment However if your vehicle is damaged in a crash the headlamp aim may be affected Aim adjustment to the low beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming drivers flash their high beam headlamps at you for vertical aim If the headlamps need to be re aimed it is recommended that you take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs see Replacement Bulbs on page 5 55 For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer retailer 5 50 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting ZN CAUTION The low beam high intensity discharge lighting System operates at a very high voltage If you try to service any of the system components you could be seriously injured Have your dealer retailer or a qualified technician service them The vehicle may have HID headlamps After an HID headlamp bulb has been replaced you may notice that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was originally This is normal Halogen Bulbs ACAUTION J Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package Headlamps To replace one of these bulbs 3 Pull the headlamp assembly away from the vehicle 1 Open the hood See Hood Release on page 5 11 to access the electrical connectors 2 Lift the
394. us You cannot know how it has been used or how far it has been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new original equipment wheel 5 80 Tire Chains ZN CAUTION Do not use tire chains There is not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on the vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to the vehicle drive slowly re adjust or remove the device if it is contacting the vehicle and do not spin the wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the rear tires If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving especially if you maintain your vehicle s tires properly If air goes out of a tire it is much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position a
395. ush it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Engine Oil L6 Engine SEERE RESO V8 Engine If the oil is below the L mark for the L6 engine or the cross hatched area at the tip of the dipstick for the V8 engine add at least one quart liter of the recommended oil This section explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications on page 5 113 Notice Do not add too much oil If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area F that shows the proper operating range for the L6 engine or above the cross hatched area for the V8 engine the engine could be damaged E Rz FA phia Meili SAE 5W 30 AR Except 6 0L V8 VIN Code H Engine 6 0L V8 VIN Code H Engine See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine oil fill cap Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are through 6 0L V8 VIN Code H Engine Only Remove the engine cover to access the engine oil fill cap Remove the screw in the center of the cover Remove the cover from the stud on the driver side Pull the cover up and off the bracket PON gt Reverse the steps to reinstall What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Except Vehicles with 6 0L V8 VIN Code H Engine Look for three things RECOMMENDED S
396. usly injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though the airbag is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag if The right front passenger seat is unoccupied The system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat The system determines that a small child is present in a child restraint The system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat A right front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time The right front passenger seat is occupied by a smaller person such as a child who has outgrown child restraints Or if there is a critical problem with the airbag System or the passenger sensing system When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator will light and stay lit to remi
397. vent over spray apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth Notice Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on the vehicle could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the rear window defogger When cleaning the glass on the vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in the vehicle s breathing space Before using cleaners read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label While cleaning the vehicle s interior maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle s doors and windows Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles Products that remove odors from the vehicle s upholstery and clean the vehicle s glass can be obtained from your dealer retailer 5 98 Do not clean the vehicle using A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface A stiff brush It can cause damage to the vehicle s interior surfaces Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a cleaning cloth Use of heavy pressure can damage the interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers can leave residue that streaks and attracts dirt For liquid cleaners about 20 drops per gallon 3 78 L of water is a good guide Use only mild neutral pH soaps Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery
398. vides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process from the time you file your complaint to the final decision should be completed in approximately 70 days We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal quick and free of charge For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP call toll free 1 800 207 0685 or call Saab Customer Communication Centre 1 800 263 1999 or write to Mediation Arbitration Program c o Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Limited Mail Code CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Online Owner Center Online Owner Center U S www gmownercenter com saab Information and services customized for your specific vehicle all in one convenient place Digital owner manual warranty information and more Online service and maintenance records Find Saab dealers for service nationwide Exclusive privileges and offers Recall notices for your specific vehicle OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries Other Helpful Links Saab www saab com Saab Merchandise www saabexpressions com
399. ving at 38 psi 262 kPa The inflation pressure for the front tires should be set to the cold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label Racing or other competitive driving may affect the warranty coverage of your vehicle See your warranty booklet for more information Tire Pressure Monitor System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated 5 67 Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
400. w the y instructions listed next 5 91 2 If visible first try to tighten the cable by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice You cannot overtighten the cable 3 Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise three or four turns 4 Repeat this procedure at least two times If the spare tire lowers to the ground continue with Step 2 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5 83 5 Turn the wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches 15 cm of cable is exposed 6 Attach the jack handle extension s and the wheel wrench to the jack and place it under the vehicle towards the front of the rear bumper Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire 7 Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the end fitting 8 Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place The secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack 5 92 9 Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable 10 Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and carefully remove the jack Use one hand to push against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand 11 If the spare tire is hanging from the cable insert the
401. w well the cruise control works on hills depends upon the vehicle s speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle s speed When going downhill you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle s speed down When the brakes are applied this disengages the cruise control Ending Cruise Control To turn off the cruise control do one of the following Step lightly on the brake pedal move the cruise control switch to Q or shift the transmission to N Neutral f your vehicle has the StabiliTrak feature cruise control will turn off if road conditions cause StabiliTrak to activate f the accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds cruise control will turn off The cruise control will turn off automatically if the traction control system or StabiliTrak system activate if your vehicle has either feature Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set speed memory is erased when the cruise control or the ignition is turned off Headlamps The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the turn signal multifunction lever See Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 6 XX Exterior Lamp Control Turn the control with this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps The exterior lamp control has the following four positions o On Off Turns off the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and Aut
402. warding or skipping of the copyright information or the previews Some DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished If the DVD does not begin to play the main title refer to the on screen instructions Stopping and Resuming Playback To stop playing a disc press and release the stop button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control To resume playback press the play pause button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control The movie should resume play from where it was last stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice If the disc has been ejected or if the stop button has been pressed twice the disc will resume play at the beginning Ejecting a Disc Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate to eject the disc There is not an eject button on the remote control If a disc is ejected from the player but is not removed the DVD player will reload the disc after a short period of time The disc will be stored in the DVD player The DVD player will not resume play of the disc automatically 3 89 Remote Control To use the remote control aim it at the transmitter window below the video screen and press the desired button Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the ability of the RSE system to receive signals from the remote control If the remote control does not seem to be working the batteries may need to be replaced See Battery Repl
403. wer gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and or hilly conditions 4 30 Three important considerations have to do with weight The weight of the trailer The weight of the trailer tongue The weight on the vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how the rig is used For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section for more information Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight Look in the following chart to find the maximum trailer weight for the vehicle Max Taller Wi SOW AWD 4 2 L L6 Engine 5 600 Ibs 2 540 kg 10 500 Ibs 4 763 kg AWD 5 3 L V8 Engine 6 500 Ibs 2 948 kg 11 500 Ibs 5 216 kg AWD 6 0 L V8 Engine 6 500 Ibs 2 948 kg 11 500 Ibs 5 216 kg The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment and conversion The GCWR for the vehicle should not be ex
404. will show the selection This function is inactive if the radio is set to the same source To scan preset radio stations press and hold the SEEK button for two seconds and the radio will go to the next preset station Hold this button down and the radio will continue to go through all available preset stations This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio When a CD is playing press the SEEK button to go to the next track on the CD This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a CD When a CD is playing in the six disc CD player press and hold the SEEK button for two seconds to go to the next CD if multiple CDs are loaded This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a CD Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN The radio does not operate and LOCKED displays if the radio is stolen or moved to a different vehicle When the when the ignition is in the off position a blinking red light on the upper left side of the radio indicates that THEFTLOCK is armed Audio Steering Wheel Controls Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel P SEEK 4 Press to go to the next or to the previous radio station and stay there The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band When a CD
405. with safety belts not instead of them Whether or not an airbag is provided all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection That is true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions Q If am a good driver and I never drive far from A home why should I wear safety belts You may be an excellent driver but if you are in a crash even one that is not your fault you and your passenger s can be hurt Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This section is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and infants If a child will be riding in the vehicle see Older Children on page 1 28 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 31 Follow those rules for everyone s protection It is very important for all occupants to buckle up Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety
406. y United States Canada This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON RUN If it does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 27 ZN CAUTION The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped have the vehicle towed for service 3 31 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light For vehicles with the Antilock Brake System ABS this light comes on briefly when the engine is started If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off If the ABS light stays on turn the ignition off If the light comes on while driving stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off Then start the engine again to reset the system If the ABS light stays on or comes on again while driving the vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light is not o
407. y To select your preference for automatic unlocking press lt while UNLOCK DOORS IN PARK is displayed on the DIC Pressing lt will scroll through the following settings UNLOCK DOORS IN PARK default All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P Park UNLOCK DRIVER IN PARK The driver s door will be unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into P Park UNLOCK DOORS KEY OUT All of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition UNLOCK DOORS MANUALLY The doors will not be unlocked automatically To select a setting and move on to the next feature press X while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 9 for more information 3 52 Lock Feedback Press E until LOCK FEEDBACK BOTH appears in the display To select your preference for the feedback you receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter press lt while LOCK FEEDBACK BOTH is displayed on the DIC Pressing will scroll through the following settings LOCK FEEDBACK BOTH default The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the lock symbol on the RKE transmitter and the horn will chirp the second time you press the lock button LOCK FEEDBACK OFF There will be no feedback when locking the vehicle LOCK FEEDBACK LAMPS The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the lock symbol on
408. y corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Recommended Fluids and Usage Fuer Lubricants 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and use only DEX COOL Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part Engine Coolant coolant See Engine Coolant on number or specification can be obtained from your page 5 30 dpaler realer Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or System equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid Usage Fluid Lubricant ue Windshield Washer Solvent Chassis Lubricant meeting VEI Asa requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Engine oil which meets Standard GM6094M and displays the Engine Oil American Petroleum Institute Except Certified for Gasoline Engines 6 0L V8 Engine starburst symbol To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle s engine see Engine Oil on page 5 18 Power Steering Fluid Power Steering Part No U S 89021184 System in Canada 89021186 Automatic DEXRONS VI Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid The engine requires a special engine oil meeting Standard GM4718M Oils meeting this standard can be identified as synthetic and should also be identified with the American Engine Oil Petroleum Institute API Certified for 6 0L V8 Engine Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Only However not all synthetic API oils with the starburst symbol will meet this standard
409. y the system before any problem is apparent which may prevent serious damage to the vehicle This system is also designed to assist your dealer in correctly diagnosing a malfunction 3 40 Check Gages Warning Light The check gages light will come on briefly when you are starting the engine If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones Gate Ajar Light If this light comes on the liftgate or liftglass is not completely shut Close the liftgate or liftglass Never drive with the liftgate or liftglass even partially open Fuel Gage I I S 2 X 2 E F Q e D D O O United States Canada When the ignition is on the fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have remaining An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on Here are four things that some owners ask about None of these show a problem with your fuel gage At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads full It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up The gage doesn t go back to empty when you turn off the ignition Low Fuel Wa
410. y affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts Saab accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle Your Saab dealer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine Saab accessories When you go to your Saab dealer and ask for Saab accessories you will know that Saab trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine Saab accessories Also see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 65 California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Engine exhaust many parts and systems including some inside the vehicle many fluids and some component wear by products contain and or emit these chemicals California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain types of automotive applications such as airbag initiators seat belt pretensioners and lithium batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters may contain perchlorate materials Special handling may be necessary For additional information see www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Doing Your Own Service Work A CAUTION You can be injured and the vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it e Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and
411. your vehicle s capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s capacity weight Your vehicle has an electronically controlled air suspension system that automatically keeps your vehicle level as you load and unload your vehicle See Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System on page 4 28 for additional information Example 3 Item Description Vehicle Capacity A Weight for ren Example 3 g Subtract Occupant Weight 200 Ibs ese 91 kg x 5 g Available Cargo 0 Ibs 0 kg 4 25 Certification Tire Label GAWR FRT GAWR RR A vehicle specific Certification Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver s door The label shows the size of your vehicle s original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel cargo and trailer tongue weight if pulling a trailer The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 4 26 To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your

Saab 9-7X Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents